Sterling Refrigerator 30RA010 055 User Manual

30RA010-055  
AquaSnap® Air-Cooled Chillers  
with ComfortLink™ Controls  
50/60 Hz  
Controls, Start-Up, Operation,  
Service, and Troubleshooting  
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS  
Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be  
hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and  
equipment location (roof, elevated structures, mechanical  
rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service  
mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment.  
When working on this equipment, observe precautions in  
the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the  
equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow  
all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use  
care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in  
handling all electrical components.  
This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control  
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out  
components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recom-  
mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control  
board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic  
modules or electrical components.  
To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run  
fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing  
refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler  
fluid loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat  
exchanger, optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting  
piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures  
below 32 F (0 °C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are  
factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power  
from this chiller during winter shutdown periods without  
taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger  
and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect  
the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may  
void warranty.  
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut  
off all power to this equipment during installation and  
service. There may be more than one disconnect switch.  
Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore  
power until work is completed.  
DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building.  
Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in  
accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE  
(American National Standards Institute/American Society  
of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers)  
15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The  
accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can  
displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate  
ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of  
high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause  
heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can  
be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount  
of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and  
skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.  
Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require  
specific rotation. Test condenser fan(s) first to ensure  
proper phasing. Swap any two incoming power leads to  
correct condenser fan rotation before starting any other  
motors.  
Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss  
of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.  
DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing  
this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is  
no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the  
refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required  
when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that  
may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil  
to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.  
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.  
PC 903 Catalog No. 533-00047 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RA-2T Pg 1 1-03 Replaces: 30RA-1T  
Book 2  
Tab 5c  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 1 — Unit Sizes  
Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to  
operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, SCN  
configuration and set point data. See Fig. 8.  
NOMINAL CAPACITY  
(TONS) 50/60 Hz  
UNIT  
30RA010  
30RA015  
30RA018  
30RA022  
30RA025  
30RA030*  
30RA032†  
30RA035  
30RA040*  
30RA042†  
30RA045  
30RA050*  
30RA055*  
10/10  
14/13  
16/16  
22/20  
24/23  
27  
30  
35/34  
38  
Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off  
switch should only be used when it is required to shut the  
chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, and  
marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all  
outputs from these modules will be turned off.  
Board Addresses — The Main Base Board (MBB) has  
a 3-position Instance jumper that must be set to ‘1.’ All other  
boards have 4-position DIP switches. All switches are set to  
‘On’ for all boards.  
40  
43/45  
47  
Control Module Communication  
RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be  
visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs  
(light-emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status  
LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every  
2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify  
that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that  
the Main Base Board (MBB) is supplied with the current  
software. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem  
still persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continu-  
ously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates  
that the board should be replaced.  
GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local  
Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking  
whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED  
which should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN  
connections for potential communication errors at the board J3  
and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is  
accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in  
parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB  
provides both power and communication directly to the  
marquee display only.  
54  
*60 Hz only.  
†50 Hz only.  
MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS  
General — The 30RA air-cooled reciprocating chillers  
contain the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that  
controls and monitors all operations of the chiller.  
The control system is composed of several components as  
listed in the sections below. See Fig. 1 and 2 for typical control  
box drawing. See Fig. 3-6 for control schematics.  
Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. 7. The MBB is  
the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the  
major portion of operating software and controls the operation  
of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output  
channel information received from its inputs and from all other  
modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and  
suction pressure transducers and thermistors. See Table 2. The  
MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor  
contactor, auxiliary contacts, and other status switches. See  
Table 3. The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay outputs  
controlled by the MBB are shown in Table 4. Information  
is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication  
bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The SCN (Sterlco  
Comfort Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both  
LEN and SCN buses are made at TB3. See Fig. 8.  
YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The  
Sterlco Comfort Network (SCN) LED will blink during times  
of network communication.  
Sterlco Comfort Network (SCN) Interface —  
The 30RA chiller units can be connected to the SCN if  
desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded,  
3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed  
in the field. See Table 5. The system elements are connected to  
the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The  
positive pin of each system element communication connector  
must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on  
either side of it. This is also required for the negative and  
signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections  
for SCN should be made at TB3. Consult the SCN Contrac-  
tor’s Manual for further information.  
Scrolling Marquee Display — This standard device  
is the keypad interface used for accessing chiller information,  
reading sensor values, and testing the chiller. The marquee  
display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment LED (light-emitting  
diode) display. Eleven mode LEDs are located on the display  
as well as an Alarm Status LED. See Marquee Display Usage  
section on page 23 for further details.  
Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM  
module is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-  
installed accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA  
inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point  
and demand limit functions. The EMM module also receives  
the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit  
and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates the  
status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the  
control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to  
the inputs received.  
NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Ameri-  
can Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual  
conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,  
Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil  
shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl,  
or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of  
–20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413  
or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia  
(02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.  
It is important when connecting to a SCN communication  
bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network  
to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used  
for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white  
for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain-  
ing different colored wires.  
Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/  
Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to  
control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the  
chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off  
position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the  
Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can  
be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of  
handling a 24 vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
At each system element, the shields of its communication  
bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is  
entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield  
must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu-  
nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another,  
the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning  
suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the  
building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to  
the network:  
Table 4 — Output Relays  
RELAY  
NO.  
DESCRIPTION  
Energize Compressor A1 (010-030)  
Energize Compressor A1 and Condenser Fan A1 (032-055)  
K1  
Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan B1 at Low  
Speed (032-040)  
Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan B1 (042-055)  
K2  
K3  
K4  
K5  
K6  
K7  
K8  
Energize Chilled Water Pump 1 Output  
Energize Chilled Water Pump 2 Output  
Energize Compressor A2 (all but 010, 015 60Hz)  
Energize Compressor B2 (042-055 only)  
Alarm Relay  
1. Turn off power to the control box.  
2. Cut the SCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white  
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri-  
ate colors for different colored cables.)  
3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TB3 of the plug,  
the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the  
(–) terminal.  
4. The RJ14 SCN connector on TB3 can also be used, but is  
only intended for temporary connection (for example, a  
laptop computer running Service Tool).  
Cooler/Pump Heater  
Energize Condenser Fan at Low Speed (010-018)  
Energize Condenser Fan A1 (022-030)  
Energize Condenser Fan A2 (032-055)  
K9  
Energize Condenser Fan at High Speed (010-018)  
Energize Condenser Fan A2 (022-030)  
Energize Condenser Fan B1 at High Speed (032-040)  
Energize Condenser Fan B2 (042-055)  
K10  
K11  
Minimum Load Valve  
IMPORTANT: A shorted SCN bus cable will prevent some  
routines from running and may prevent the unit from start-  
ing. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If  
conditions return to normal, check the SCN connector and  
cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of  
the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the  
bus.  
Table 5 — SCN Communication Bus Wiring  
PART NO.  
Regular Wiring  
1895  
MANUFACTURER  
Plenum Wiring  
Alpha  
A48301  
884421  
M64430  
American  
Belden  
Columbia  
Manhattan  
Quabik  
A21451  
8205  
D6451  
M13402  
6130  
Table 2 — Thermistor Designations  
PIN  
THERMISTOR  
OPERATING DATA  
CONNECTION  
POINT  
THERMISTOR INPUT  
Cooler Leaving Fluid  
NO.  
Sensors — The electronic control uses 3 to 6 thermistors to  
sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. See  
Table 2. These sensors are outlined below. Thermistors T1, T2,  
T9 and accessory suction gas temperatures (T7,T8) are 5 kat  
77 F (25 C) and are identical in temperature versus resistance  
and voltage drop performance. Thermistor T10 is 10 kat  
77 F (25 C) and has a different temperature vs. resistance and  
voltage drop performance. See Thermistors section for  
temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics.  
T1  
T2  
J8-13,14 (MBB)  
J8-11,12 (MBB)  
J8-1,2 (MBB)  
Cooler Entering Fluid  
Circuit A Return Gas  
Temperature (Accessory)  
T7  
T8  
T9  
J8-3,4 (MBB)  
J8-7,8 (MBB)  
Circuit B (032-055 only) Return  
Gas Temperature (Accessory)  
Outdoor-Air Temperature  
Sensor  
J8-5,6 (MBB)  
TB5-5,6  
Accessory Remote Space  
Temperature Sensor or  
Dual LWT Sensor  
T10  
T1 — COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR — On 30RA010-  
030 sizes, this thermistor is installed in a friction fit well at the  
bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger on the control box  
side. For 30RA032-055 sizes, this thermistor is installed in a  
well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping coming from  
the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger opposite the  
control box side.  
T2 — COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR On 30RA010-  
030 sizes, this thermistor is installed in a friction fit well at the  
top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger on the control box side.  
For 30RA032-055 sizes, this thermistor is installed in a well in  
the factory-installed entering fluid piping coming from the top  
of the brazed-plate heat exchanger opposite the control box  
side.  
T7,T8 — COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERA-  
TURE SENSOR (ACCESSORY) — A well for this sensor  
is factory installed in each circuit's suction line. If desired, a  
5 kthermistor (Sterling part number HH79NZ029) can be  
installed in this well and connected to the Main Base Board  
as shown in Table 2. Use the Scrolling Marquee display to con-  
figure the sensor (Configuration mode, sub-mode OPT1 —  
enable item RG.EN).  
LEGEND  
LWT  
MBB  
Leaving Water Temperature  
Main Base Board  
Table 3 — Status Switches  
STATUS  
SWITCH  
PIN CONNECTION  
POINT  
J7-1,2  
Chilled Water Pump 1  
Chilled Water Pump 2  
Remote On/Off  
J7-3,4  
TB5-9,10  
J7-9,10  
J9-11,12  
J9-5,6  
Cooler Flow Switch  
Compressor Fault Signal, A1  
Compressor Fault Signal, A2  
Compressor Fault Signal, B1  
Compressor Fault Signal, B2  
J9-8,9  
J9-2,3  
T9 — OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR  
This sensor is factory-installed on a bracket at the left side of  
compressor A1 on 30RA010-030 models. For models  
30RA032-055, it is installed behind the panel below the  
control box center door.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T10 — REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR  
DUAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR —  
5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to  
the remainder of the SCN communication bus.  
One of two inputs can be connected to TB5-5 and TB5-6. See  
appropriate sensor below.  
T10 — Dual Leaving Water Temperature Sensor  
For  
dual chiller applications (parallel only are supported), connect  
the dual chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (5 kther-  
mistor, Sterling part no. HH79NZ029) to the space temperature  
input of the Master chiller. If space temperature is required for  
reset applications, connect the sensor to the Slave chiller and  
configure the slave chiller to broadcast the value to the Master  
chiller.  
T10 — Remote Space Temperature Sensor — Sensor T10  
(part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is an accessory sensor that is remotely  
mounted in the controlled space and used for space tempera-  
ture reset. The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted  
thermostat would be (in the conditioned space where it will not  
be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct  
exposure to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).  
Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to  
terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature  
sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female  
connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Sterlco  
Comfort Network (SCN) at the sensor.  
LEGEND FOR FIG. 1-6  
ALMR  
BR  
Alarm Relay  
Boiler Relay  
C
Contactor, Compressor  
Circuit Breaker  
CB  
CCB  
CHC  
COMP  
CWFS  
CWP  
DPT  
EMM  
FIOP  
FM  
Compressor Circuit Breaker  
Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor  
Compressor  
Chilled Water Flow Switch  
Chilled Water Pump  
Discharge Pressure Transducer  
Energy Management  
factory Installed Option  
Fan Motor  
To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 9):  
1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for  
the application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one  
SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other  
SEN terminal located under the cover of the space  
temperature sensor.  
2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 5 and 6  
on TB5 located in the unit control box.  
Units on the SCN can be monitored from the space at the  
sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11  
connector into the SCN (Fig. 10):  
GND  
HPS  
HR  
ICP  
IP  
Ground  
High-Pressure Switch  
Heat Relay  
Inrush Current Protection  
Internal Protection Thermostat  
Leaving Water Temperature  
Main Base Board  
Minimum Load Valve  
Manual Starter  
LWT  
MBB  
MLV  
MS  
OAT  
OL  
Outdoor-Air Thermistor  
Overload  
R
Relay  
IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector  
wiring MUST be identical to the SCN communication bus  
wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 5 for  
acceptable wiring.  
SPT  
SW  
Suction Pressure Transducer  
Switch  
T
Thermistor  
Terminal Block  
TB  
TNKR  
TRAN  
Storage Tank Heater Relay  
Transformer  
Terminal Block  
1. Cut the SCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white  
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color  
scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)  
2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the  
space temperature sensor terminal block.  
Terminal (Unmarked)  
Terminal (Marked)  
Splice  
Factory Wiring  
Field Wiring  
3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of  
the space temperature sensor.  
Accessory or Option Wiring  
To indicate common potential only;  
not to represent wiring.  
4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the  
space temperature sensor.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fig. 1 — Typical Control Box for 30RA010-030 (022-030 Shown)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fig. 2 — Typical Control Box for 30RA032-055 (042-055 Shown)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30RA010-018 AQUA SNAP  
Fig. 3 — Wiring Schematic 30RA010-018  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AQUA-SNAP LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SCHEMATIC (010-018)  
SEE NOTE 8  
SEE NOTE 8  
Fig. 3 — Wiring Schematic 30RA010-018 (cont)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30RA022-030 AQUA SNAP  
Fig. 4 — Wiring Schematic 30RA022-030  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AQUA-SNAP LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SCHEMATIC (022-030)  
Fig. 4 — Wiring Schematic 30RA022-030 (cont)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30RA032-040 AQUA SNAP  
Fig. 5 — Wiring Schematic 30RA032-040  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AQUA-SNAP LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SCHEMATIC (032-040)  
Fig. 5 — Wiring Schematic 30RA032-040 (cont)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30RA042-055 AQUA SNAP  
Fig. 6 — Wiring Schematic 30RA042-055  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AQUA-SNAP LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SCHEMATIC (042-055)  
Fig. 6 — Wiring Schematic 30RA042-055 (cont)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RED LED - STATUS  
GREEN LED -  
LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)  
YELLOW LED -  
SCN (STERLCO COMFORT NETWORK)  
INSTANCE JUMPER  
CEPL130346-01  
K11  
K10  
K9  
K5  
K8  
K6  
K7  
J1  
STATUS  
J2  
J3  
J10  
LEN  
J4  
K1  
K4  
K3  
K2  
SCN  
J5  
J6  
J7  
J8  
J9  
Fig. 7 Main Base Board  
MODE  
Run Status  
Service Test  
Temperature  
ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE  
CONTACT SWITCH  
TB3  
REMOTE  
CONTACT  
Pressures  
Setpoints  
Inputs  
Alarm Status  
OFF  
SW1  
Outputs  
Configuration  
Time Clock  
Operating Modes  
Alarms  
ESCAPE ENTER  
ENABLE  
OFF  
SW2  
ON  
SCN  
COMMUNICATIONS  
CB1  
CB2  
EMERGENCY  
ON/OFF SWITCH  
Fig. 8 LEN/SCN Interface, Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
refrigeration circuit is also supplied with a factory-installed  
liquid line filter drier and sight glass.  
The TXV is set at the factory to maintain approximately 8 to  
12° F (4.4 to 6.7° C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by  
metering the proper amount of refrigerant into the cooler. All  
TXVs are adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless  
absolutely necessary.  
SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT  
SENSOR  
TB5  
5
SEN  
SEN  
The TXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction  
temperature to 55 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for unit to  
start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the  
compressor.  
6
Fig. 9 Typical Space Temperature  
Sensor Wiring  
Capacity Control The control system cycles com-  
pressors, and minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to  
maintain the user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature  
set point. Entering fluid temperature is used by the Main Base  
Board (MBB) to determine the temperature drop across the  
cooler and is used in determining the optimum time to add or  
subtract capacity stages. The chilled fluid temperature set point  
can be automatically reset by the return fluid temperature,  
space, or outdoor-air temperature reset features. It can also be  
reset from an external 4 to 20-mA signal (requires Energy  
Management Module FIOP or accessory).  
The control has an automatic lead-lag feature built in which  
determines the wear factor (combination of starts and run  
hours) for each compressor. If all compressors are off and less  
than 30 minutes has elapsed since the last compressor was  
turned off, the wear factor is used to determine which compres-  
sor to start next. If no compressors have been running for more  
than 30 minutes and the leaving fluid temperature is greater  
than the saturated condensing temperature, the wear factor is  
still used to determine which compressor to start next. If the  
leaving fluid temperature is less than the saturated condensing  
temperature, then the control will start either compressor A1 or  
compressor B1 first, depending on the user-configurable circuit  
lead-lag value.  
The TXVs will provide a controlled start-up. During start-  
up, the low pressure logic will be bypassed for 21/2 minutes to  
allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional  
stages of compression are required, the processor control will  
add them. See Table 6 and 7.  
If a circuit is to be stopped, the compressor with the lowest  
wear factor will be shut off first in most cases. Certain override  
conditions may shut off the smaller of two compressors on a  
circuit first.  
The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The  
algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired  
set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and  
leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at  
which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based  
on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio is calculated using  
the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any  
changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value  
ranges from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a  
compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the  
ratio reaches +100% (–100%). If installed, the minimum load  
valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity.  
Minimum load valve value is a fixed 30% in the total capacity  
calculation. The control will also use the minimum load valve  
solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last  
compressor. If the close control feature (CLS.C) [Configura-  
tion, OPT2] is enabled the control will use the minimum load  
valve solenoid whenever possible to fine tune leaving fluid  
temperature control. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each  
capacity step change. Refer to Tables 6 and 7.  
T-55 SPACE  
SENSOR  
6
SCN+  
5
4
3
2
1
TO SCN  
SCN GND  
COMM 1  
BUS (PLUG)  
AT UNIT  
SCN-  
Fig. 10 SCN Communications Bus Wiring  
to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector  
Energy Management Module (Fig. 11) This  
factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is  
used for the following types of temperature reset, demand  
limit, and/or ice features:  
4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires  
field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)  
4 to 20 mA cooling set point reset (requires field-  
supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)  
Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires field-  
supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,  
50 mA load)  
4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to  
20 mA generator)  
Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires field-  
supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,  
50 mA load)  
See Demand Limit and Temperature Reset sections on  
pages 44 and 43 for further details.  
Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-  
turer’s control systems due to possible power supply  
differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.  
The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.  
ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A  
signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave  
bridge signal generating device is used.  
Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection A proof-of-cooler  
flow device is factory installed in all chillers. It is recommended  
that proper operation of the switch be verified on a regular basis.  
Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) All units  
are equipped from the factory with conventional TXVs. Each  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CEBD430351-0396-01C  
J1  
J2  
LEN  
J4  
J3  
STATUS  
J5  
J7  
J6  
TEST 2  
GREEN LED -  
LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)  
ADDRESS  
DIP SWITCH  
RED LED - STATUS  
Fig. 11 Energy Management Module  
Table 6 Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units without Minimum Load Valve  
LOADING SEQ A  
LOADING SEQ B  
CONTROL  
STEPS  
30RA UNIT SIZE  
% Displacement  
Compressor  
% Displacement  
Compressor  
010,015 (60 Hz)  
015 (50 Hz), 018  
1
1
2
100  
50  
100  
A1  
A1  
A1,A2  
1
2
42  
100  
A1  
A1, A2  
022 (60 Hz)  
1
2
50  
100  
A1  
A1,A2  
022 (50 Hz), 025, 030  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
25  
60  
A1  
40  
65  
B1  
032, 035 (60 Hz)  
035 (50 Hz)  
040  
A1,A2  
A1,B1  
100  
A1,A2,B1  
100  
A1,A2,B1  
33  
67  
100  
32  
63  
100  
A1  
33  
67  
100  
37  
68  
100  
B1  
A1, A2  
A1, B1  
A1, A2, B1  
A1, A2, B1  
A1  
B1  
A1, A2  
A1, B1  
A1, A2, B1  
A1, A2, B1  
1
2
3
25  
50  
75  
A1  
25  
50  
75  
B1  
A1,B1  
A1,B1  
042, 045 (50 Hz), 050,  
055  
A1,A2,B1  
A1,B1,B2  
4
100  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
100  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
1
2
22  
44  
A1  
A1,B1  
22  
44  
B1  
A1,B1  
045 (60 Hz)  
3
4
72  
A1,A2,B1  
72  
A1,B1,B2  
100  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
100  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity staging sequences.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 7 Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units with Minimum Load Valve  
LOADING SEQ A  
LOADING SEQ B  
CONTROL  
STEPS  
30RA UNIT SIZE  
% Displacement  
Compressor  
% Displacement  
Compressor  
1
2
1
2
69/ 71  
A1*  
A1  
A1*  
A1  
010 (50/60 Hz)  
015 (60 Hz)  
100/100  
79  
100  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
28  
50  
A1*  
A1  
015 (50 Hz)  
018 (50/60 Hz)  
022 (50/60 Hz)  
025 (50/60 Hz)  
030  
100  
A1,A2  
32/ 31  
50/ 50  
100/100  
27/ 35  
42/ 50  
100/100  
38/ 37  
50/ 50  
100/100  
39  
50  
100  
A1*  
A1  
A1,A2  
A1*  
A1  
A1,A2  
A1*  
A1  
A1,A2  
A1*  
A1  
A1,A2  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
15  
25  
A1*  
A1  
30  
40  
B1*  
B1  
032  
035 (50/60 Hz)  
040  
60  
A1,A2  
A1,A2,B1  
65  
A1,B1  
A1,A2,B1  
100  
100  
16/25  
25/33  
60/67  
100  
A1*  
A1  
A1,A2  
A1,A2,B1  
A1*  
A1  
A1,A2  
A1,A2,B1  
32/25  
40/33  
65/67  
100  
B1*  
B1  
A1,B1  
A1,A2,B1  
B1*  
B1  
A1,B1  
A1,A2,B1  
24  
32  
29  
37  
63  
68  
100  
100  
1
2
3
4
5
18  
25  
A1*  
A1  
18  
25  
B1*  
B1  
042  
50  
A1,B1  
50  
A1,B1  
75  
100  
A1,A2,B1  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
75  
100  
A1,B1,B2  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
15  
22  
A1*  
A1  
15  
22  
B1*  
B1  
045 (60 Hz)  
045 (50 Hz), 050  
44  
A1,B1  
44  
A1,B1  
72  
100  
A1,A2,B1  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
72  
100  
A1,B1,B2  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
19  
25  
A1*  
A1  
A1,B1  
19  
25  
B1*  
B1  
A1,B1  
50  
50  
77  
A1,A2,B1  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
77  
A1,B1,B2  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
100  
100  
1
2
3
4
5
20  
25  
A1*  
A1  
20  
25  
B1*  
B1  
055  
50  
A1,B1  
50  
A1,B1  
75  
100  
A1,A2,B1  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
75  
100  
A1,B1,B2  
A1,A2,B1,B2  
*Minimum Load Valve energized.  
NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity  
staging sequences.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed  
only in the network display tables (using Service Tool,  
ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS® software) and  
represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start  
its initialization routine. This value can be zero without the  
machine running in many situations. This can include being  
unoccupied, ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in  
the OFF position, SCN not allowing unit to start, Demand  
Limit in effect, no call for cooling due to no load, and alarm or  
alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and  
none of the above are true, a minimum off time (DELY, see  
below) may be in effect. The machine should start normally  
once the time limit has expired.  
MINUTES OFF TIME (DELY) [Configuration OPT2] —  
This user-configurable time period is used by the control to  
determine how long unit operation is delayed after power is  
applied/restored to the unit. Typically, this time period is con-  
figured when multiple machines are located on a single site.  
For example, this gives the user the ability to prevent all the  
units from restarting at once after a power failure. A value of  
zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be  
running.  
LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION — This is a configurable  
choice and is factory set to be automatic for all units. The value  
can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading as desired. Set  
at automatic, the control will sum the current number of logged  
circuit starts and one-quarter of the current operating hours for  
each circuit. The circuit with the lowest sum is started first.  
Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and which is the lag  
are also made when total machine capacity is at 100% or when  
there is a change in the direction of capacity (increase or  
decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.  
Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity  
stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature  
is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and  
moving towards the set point.  
Ramp Loading (CRMP) [Configuration, SLCT] — Limits the  
rate of change of leaving fluid temperature. If the unit is in a  
Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading, the control  
makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of ca-  
pacity. The control calculates a temperature difference between  
the control point and leaving fluid temperature. If the differ-  
ence is greater than 4 °F (2.2 °C) and the rate of change (°F or  
°C per minute) is more than the configured Cooling Ramp  
Loading value (CRMP), the control does not allow any chang-  
es to the current stage of capacity.  
Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the  
entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the  
control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being  
used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes  
an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The  
lowest stage will not be removed.  
Minimum Load Control — If equipped, the minimum load  
control valve is energized only when one compressor in the  
circuit is running. If the close control feature is enabled the  
minimum load control valve may be used as needed to obtain  
leaving fluid temperature close to set point.  
Cooler Freeze Protection — The control will try to prevent  
shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm  
by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected  
is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid  
selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine freeze Point  
(BR.FZ) [Set Points, FRZ]. This alarm condition (A207) only  
references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze  
point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the  
freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately  
remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every  
30 seconds.  
Low Saturated Suction Protection — The control will try to  
prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction  
conditions by removing stages of capacity. These circuit alert  
conditions (T116, T117) compare saturated suction tempera-  
ture to the configured Brine Freeze point (BR.FZ) [Set Points,  
FRZ]. The Brine Freeze point is a user-configurable value that  
must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for 100% water systems. A lower  
value may be entered for systems with brine solutions, but this  
value should be set according to the freeze protection level of  
the brine mixture. Failure to properly set this brine freeze point  
value may permanently damage the brazed plate heat exchang-  
er. The control will initiate Mode 7 (Circuit A) or Mode 8 (Cir-  
cuit B) to indicate a circuit’s capacity is limited and that even-  
tually the circuit may shut down.  
CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following over-  
rides will modify the normal operation of the routine.  
Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband  
Multiplier (Z.GN) [Configuration, SLCT] has a default value  
of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than 1.0,  
this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor. The  
larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay between  
adding or removing stages of capacity. Figure 12 shows how  
compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving water  
temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and be-  
low the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0 to  
4.0 for systems with small loop volumes.  
First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero,  
the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding  
the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied  
when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of  
capacity.  
2 STARTS  
DEADBAND EXAMPLE  
47  
46  
45  
8
7
6
5
44  
43  
42  
41  
0
200  
400  
600  
800  
1000  
3 STARTS  
TIME (SECONDS)  
STANDARD  
DEADBAND  
LEGEND  
LWT Leaving Water Temperature  
MODIFIED  
DEADBAND  
Fig. 12 Deadband Multiplier  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
saturated condensing and saturated suction temperatures so  
that the compressor(s) is (are) always operating within the  
manufacturer's specified envelope (see Fig. 13). The control  
will automatically reduce the unit capacity as the saturated  
condensing temperature approaches an upper limit. The  
control will indicate through an alert that a high ambient  
unloading mode is in effect. If the saturated condensing  
temperature in a circuit exceeds the calculated maximum, the  
circuit will be stopped. For these reasons, there are no head  
pressure control methods or set points to enter. If the saturated  
condensing temperature in a circuit is greater than or equal to  
95 F (35 C) at start-up, all available condenser fans will be  
started to prevent excessive discharge pressure during  
pull-down. The control will turn off a fan stage when the  
condensing temperature has been below the calculated head  
pressure set point by 35 F (19.4 C) for more than 2 minutes.  
Fan sequences are shown in Fig. 14.  
MOTORMASTER® V OPTION — For low-ambient opera-  
tion, the lead fan on a circuit can be equipped with the  
Motormaster V head pressure controller option or accessory.  
The control will automatically raise the head pressure set point  
by 5 F (2.8 C) when Motormaster control is configured. The  
controller is energized with the first fan stage and adjusts fan  
speed to maintain a liquid pressure of 135 psig (931 kPa). For  
sizes 010-018 and Circuit B of sizes 032-040, the two-speed  
fan is wired for high speed operation and the Motormaster V  
controller adjusts fan speed. For size 022-030, 042-055 and  
circuit A of the 032-040 sizes, the lead fan (A1 or B1) in the  
circuit is controlled. Refer to Fig. 14 for condenser fan staging  
information. Refer to Fig. 15 for typical pressure transducer  
location.  
Head Pressure Control The Main Base Board  
(MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest  
condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit  
efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing tempera-  
ture input from the discharge pressure transducer to control the  
fans. Head pressure control is maintained through a calculated  
set point which is automatically adjusted based on actual  
160  
154  
149  
140  
120  
100  
80  
105  
78  
60  
47.5  
40  
-10 -5  
0
5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55  
R-22 SST (F)  
LEGEND  
SCT  
SST  
Saturated Condensing Temperature  
Saturated Suction Temperature  
Fig. 13 Operating Envelope for  
R-22 Maneurop Compressor  
FAN ARRANGEMENT  
30RAN010-018  
CONTROL  
FAN NO.  
FAN RELAY  
NORMAL CONTROL  
Energize Fan at  
Low Speed  
1
1
1
2
FC-LS  
FC-HS  
FC-A1  
FC-A2  
BOX  
1
Energize Fan at  
High Speed  
END  
30RAN022-030  
First Stage  
Condenser Fan  
CONTROL  
BOX  
1
2
2
Second Stage  
Condenser Fan  
END  
On with Compressor A1  
and/or Compressor A2  
First Stage Condenser  
Fan, Circuit A  
Low Speed, Fan on  
w/Compressor B1  
Energize Fan at High Speed,  
Circuit B  
On with Compressor A1  
and/or Compressor A2  
First Stage Condenser Fan,  
Circuit A  
On with Compressor B1  
and/or Compressor B2  
First Stage Condenser Fan,  
Circuit B  
30RAN032-040  
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
FC-A1  
FC-A2  
FC-LS  
FC-HS  
FC-A1  
FC-A2  
FC-B1  
FC-B2  
CONTROL  
BOX  
END  
1
3
30RAN042-055  
CONTROL  
BOX  
END  
1
3
2
4
Fig. 14 30RA Condenser Fan Sequence  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DETAIL A  
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER  
INSTALLED HERE  
SEE DETAIL A  
Fig. 15 Typical Motormaster® V Controller and Pressure Transducer Location (Sizes 022-030 Shown)  
Operation of Machine Based on Control  
Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Set-  
tings Machine On/Off control is determined by the  
configuration of the control method (CTRL) [Configuration,  
OPT2] and cooling set point select (CLSP) [Configuration,  
SLCT] variables. All models are factory configured with cool-  
ing set point select set to 1 (single set point, CSP1). With the  
control method set to 0, simply switching the Enable/Off/Re-  
mote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote Contact position  
(external contacts closed) will put the chiller in an occupied  
state. The control mode [Operating Modes, MODE] will be 1  
(OFF LOCAL) when the switch is Off and will be 5 (ON LO-  
CAL) when in the Enable position or Remote Contact position  
with external contacts closed.  
Two other control methods are available for Machine On/  
Off control:  
OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE (CTRL=2) — The Main Base  
Board will use the operating schedules as defined under the  
Time Clock mode in the Marquee display. These schedules are  
identical. The schedule number must be set to 1 for local  
schedule.  
Table 8 illustrates how the control method and cooling set  
point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the  
set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the  
ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.  
Cooling Set Point Select  
SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1  
(CSP1) [Set Point, COOL].  
DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set  
Point 1 (CSP1) [Set Point, COOL] when the Dual Set Point  
switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (CSP2)  
[Set Point, COOL] when they are closed.  
DUAL SCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on  
Cooling Set Point 1 (CSP1) [Set Point, COOL] during the  
Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (CSP2) [Set Point,  
COOL] during the Unoccupied mode as configured under the  
local occupancy schedule accessible only from SCN. Schedule  
Number in Table SCHEDOVR (See Appendix A) must be  
configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is set to 0, the unit will  
operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied mode. Control method  
must be configured to 0 (switch). See Table 8.  
4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external  
4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module  
(EMM).  
The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99  
for operation under a SCN global schedule. The Enable/Off/  
Remote Contact must be in the Enable or Remote Contact posi-  
tion. The control mode [Operating Modes, MODE] will be 1  
when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 3 when the  
Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and the time of  
day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control  
mode will be 7 when the time of day is during an occupied  
period.  
SCN SCHEDULE (CTRL=3) — An external SCN device  
such as Flotronic™ System Manager controls the On/Off state  
of the machine. This SCN device forces the variable  
‘CHIL_S_S’ between Start/Stop to control the chiller. The  
control mode [Operating Modes, MODE] will be 1 when the  
switch is Off. The control mode will be 2 when the Enable/Off/  
Remote Contact switch input is On and the CHIL_S_S variable  
is ‘Stop.’ Similarly, the control mode will be 6 when the  
CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Start.’  
LOW SOUND MODE OPERATION — All models are fac-  
tory configured with the Low Sound Mode disabled. In the  
Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2, items for low  
sound mode select (LS.MD), low sound start time (LS.ST),  
low sound end time (LS.ND) and low sound capacity limit  
(LS.LT) are factory configured so that the chiller always runs  
as quietly as possible. This results in operation at increased  
saturated condensing temperature. As a result, some models  
may not be able to achieve rated efficiency. For chiller opera-  
tion at rated efficiency, disable the low sound mode or adjust  
the low sound mode start and stop times accordingly or set both  
times to 00:00 for rated efficiency operation 24 hours per day.  
In addition, the low sound capacity limit can be used to reduce  
overall chiller capacity, if required, by limiting the maximum to  
a user-configured percentage.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 8 Control Methods and Cooling Set Points  
COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP)  
CONTROL  
TYPE  
(CTRL)  
OCCUPANCY  
STATE  
0
1
2
3
(single)  
(dual, switch)  
(dual, occ)  
(4 to 20 mA)  
Occupied  
Unoccupied  
Occupied  
Unoccupied  
Occupied  
Unoccupied  
ON,CSP1  
ON,CSP1  
ON,CSP1  
OFF  
ON,CSP1  
ON,CSP1  
ON*  
ON*  
ON*  
OFF  
ON*  
ON*  
ON,CSP1  
ON,CSP2  
Illegal  
Illegal  
ON,CSP1  
ON,CSP2  
ON†  
ON  
ON†  
OFF  
ON†  
ON†  
0 (switch)  
2 (Occupancy)  
3 (SCN)  
*Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.  
Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to Energy Management Module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3,5.  
HEATING OPERATION — The chiller can be used for  
pump outputs or optional factory-installed hydronic system  
operation can be utilized for heating applications. The heating  
mode is activated when the control sees a field-supplied closed  
switch input to terminal block TB5-7,8. The control locks out  
cooling when the heat relay input is seen. A field-supplied  
boiler relay connection is made using heat relay and alarm  
relay contacts. Factory-installed ‘BOILER’ connections exist  
in the control panel near TB5 for these applications. Alarms  
and alerts A189 through A202 are active during heating  
operation.  
NOTE: When the LANG variable is changed to 1, 2, or 3, all  
appropriate display expansions will immediately change to the  
new language. No power-off or control reset is required when  
reconfiguring languages.  
When a specific item is located, the display will flash show-  
ing the operator, the item, followed by the item value and then  
followed by the item units (if any). Press the  
key to  
ENTER  
stop the display at the item value. Items in the Configuration  
and Service Test modes are password protected. The display  
will flash PASS and WORD when required. Use the  
ENTER  
and arrow keys to enter the 4 digits of the password. The  
default password is 1111.  
Marquee Display Usage (See Fig. 16 and  
Tables 8-27) The Marquee display module provides the  
user interface to the ComfortLink™ control system. The  
Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in  
the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press  
display has up and down arrow keys, an  
key, and an  
ESCAPE  
key. These keys are used to navigate through the  
ENTER  
different levels of the display structure. See Table 9. Press the  
key until the display is blank to move through the  
to stop the display at the item value. Press the  
key again so that the item value flashes. Use the  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
arrow keys to change the value or state of an item and press the  
top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the  
display.  
key to accept it. Press the key and the  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
item, value, or units display will resume. Repeat the process as  
required for other items.  
Pressing the  
and  
keys simultaneously  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
will scroll a clear language text description across the display  
indicating the full meaning of each display acronym. Pressing  
See Tables 8-27 for further details.  
Service Test (See Table 11) Both main power  
the  
and  
keys when the display is blank  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
and control circuit power must be on.  
(Mode LED level) will return the Marquee display to its default  
menu of rotating display items. In addition, the password will  
be disabled requiring that it be entered again before changes  
can be made to password protected items.  
The Service Test function should be used to verify proper  
operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load  
valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s) and remote alarm  
relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote  
Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display  
keys and Table 11 to enter the mode and display TEST. Press  
Clear language descriptions in English, Spanish, French, or  
Portuguese can be displayed when properly configuring the  
LANG Item in the Configuration Mode, under the Display  
(DISP) submode. See Table 17. Throughout this text, the loca-  
tion of items in the menu structure will be described in the fol-  
lowing format:  
twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the password if  
ENTER  
required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST value to the  
ON position and press . Press and the  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
Item Expansion (ITEM) [Mode Name, Sub-mode Name]  
For example, using the language selection item:  
Language Selection (LANG) [Configuration, DISP]  
button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode.  
Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by  
changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete  
outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for  
10 minutes. Test the compressor and minimum load valve  
solenoid (if installed) outputs in a similar manner. The  
minimum load valve solenoids will be turned off if there is no  
keypad activity for 10 minutes. Compressors will stay on until  
they are turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will  
remain enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors  
running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn  
a compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other  
mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during  
the TEST mode. The STAT item [Run/Status, VIEW] will dis-  
play “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST  
sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chill-  
er can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal  
operation.  
MODE  
Run Status  
Service Test  
Temperature  
Pressures  
Setpoints  
Alarm Status  
Inputs  
Outputs  
Configuration  
Time Clock  
Operating Modes  
Alarms  
ESCAPE ENTER  
Fig. 16 Scrolling Marquee Display  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (PM1E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package —  
If the chiller has factory-installed chilled fluid pumps, specific  
steps should be followed for proper operation.  
NO.  
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (PM2E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
NO.  
The pump(s) in the hydronic package come factory  
pre-wired into the main unit power supply/starter. In order to  
check proper pump rotation, use the Service Test function to  
test the condenser fans and observe them for proper rotation  
(counter clockwise when viewed from the top). If fans turn  
correctly, the pumps will rotate correctly. Clockwise rotation of  
the pump motor cooling fans can also be used to determine that  
pumps are rotating correctly.  
The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump  
Starter is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil  
is powered from the chiller control system. The starter should  
be wired between TB5-11 and TB5-13. If equipped, the field-  
installed chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should  
be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch.  
The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the  
machine is “On.” The chilled water pump interlock circuit  
consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed  
chilled water pump interlock. If the chilled water pump inter-  
lock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting,  
an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock failed to close at Start-Up  
alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.  
If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow  
switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being  
closed, an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened  
During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the ma-  
chine will stop.  
NO INTEGRAL PUMP — DUAL EXTERNAL PUMP  
CONTROL — With two external pumps, the following  
options must be configured:  
Operation of pump in wrong direction, even for a few  
seconds, can cause irreversible damage to pump impeller  
and housing. Always verify correct wiring/pump rotation  
before operation.  
Use Service Test function to test operation of pumps. Verify  
that the flow switch input is made when the pump is running.  
For dual pump hydronic systems, the control only uses one  
pump at a time. Consult the Installation Instructions supplied  
with this chiller and use the circuit setter balancing valve  
installed in hydronic package to adjust fluid flow rate.  
Cooler Pump Control The 30RA AquaSnap® ma-  
chines equipped with a factory installed pump package are  
configured with the Cooler Pump Control (CPC) [Configura-  
tion, OPT1] ON.  
Machines not equipped with a pump package are config-  
ured with the cooler pump control OFF. It is recommended that  
the machine control the chilled water pump. If not, a 5-minute  
time delay is required after the command to shut the machine  
down is sent before the chilled water pump is turned off. This is  
required to maintain water flow during the shutdown period of  
the machine.  
With or without this option enabled, the cooler pump relay  
will be energized when the machine enters an ON status (i.e.,  
On Local, On SCN, On Time). An A207 - Cooler Freeze  
Protection Alarm, will energize the cooler pump relay also, as  
an override. The cooler pump relay will remain energized if the  
machine is in MODE 10 – Minimum Off Time.  
• Cooler Pump Control (CPC) [Configuration, OPT1] ON.  
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (PM1E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
YES.  
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (PM2E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
YES.  
The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump  
Starters is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter  
coil is powered from the chiller control system. The starter for  
Chilled Water Pump 1 should be wired between TB5-11 and  
TB5-13. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 2 should be wired  
between TB5-15 and TB5-13. A field-installed chilled water  
pump interlock for each pump must be connected to each  
pump’s interlock points on the Main Base Board. The Chilled  
Water Pump 1 Interlock, CWP1, must be connected to MBB-  
J7-1 and –2. The Chilled Water Pump 2 Interlock, CWP2, must  
be connected to MBB-J7-3 and –4. The chilled water pump  
interlock contacts should be rated for dry circuit application  
capable of handling 5 vdc at 2 mA.  
Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation At any-  
time the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one of the  
following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be enabled.  
SINGLE INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single  
pump, the following options must be configured:  
1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE,  
(CTRL=0).  
• Cooler Pump Control (CPC) [Configuration, OPT1] ON.  
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (PM1E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
YES.  
2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with  
a
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (PM2E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
NO.  
Start-Stop remote contact closure, (CTRL=0).  
3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule  
in combination with items 1 or 2, (CTRL=2).  
4. A SCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination  
with items 1 or 2, (CTRL=3).  
As stated before, there are certain alarm conditions and  
Operating Modes that will turn the cooler pump relay ON. This  
sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump  
control algorithm.  
When the unit cycles from an “On” state to an “Off” state,  
the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler  
Pump Shutdown Delay (PM.DY) [Configuration, OPT1]. This  
is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default is 1  
minute. If the pump output was deenergized during the transi-  
tion period, the pump output will not be energized.  
NO INTEGRAL PUMP — SINGLE EXTERNAL PUMP  
CONTROL — With a single external pump, the following  
options must be configured:  
With a single integral pump, the Cooler Pump Starter will  
be energized when the machine is occupied. As part of the  
factory-installed package, an auxiliary set of contacts is wired  
to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. When  
the mechanical cooling is called for, the pump interlock and  
flow switch is checked. If the circuits are closed, the machine  
starts its capacity routine. If the auxiliary contact interlock does  
not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T190 —  
Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert  
will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not  
be allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not  
close within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A  
T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up  
Alert and an A200 – Cooler Flow/Interlock failed to close at  
Start-Up will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to  
start.  
If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds  
after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1  
Running Alert and an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts  
• Cooler Pump Control (CPC) [Configuration, OPT1]  
OFF.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated  
and the machine will stop.  
will not be allowed to start. In either fault case listed above,  
Pump 2 will be commanded to start once Pump 1 has failed.  
If the control detects the chilled water pump interlock open  
for 25 seconds after initially being closed, a T194 — Cooler  
Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is  
generated and the unit is shut down.  
If the control detects the chilled water flow switch circuit  
closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF, an  
A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off  
Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to  
start.  
If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary  
contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is  
OFF, a T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While  
Pump Off Alert is generated. The chiller will not be allowed to  
start.  
If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit  
closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 — Cooler Pump and  
Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit  
will be prevented from starting.  
If Pump 2 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does  
not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T191 —  
Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert  
will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not be  
allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not close  
within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A T193  
— Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and  
an A200 – Cooler Flow/Interlock failed to close at Start-Up  
will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start. In  
either fault case listed above, Pump 1 will be commanded to  
start once Pump 2 has failed.  
If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds  
after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1  
Running Alert or T197 — Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running  
Alert for the appropriate pump and an A201 — Cooler Flow/  
Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm  
will be generated and the machine will stop. If available, the  
other pump will be started. If flow is proven, the machine will  
be allowed to restart.  
As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pump can be  
started to maintain lubrication of the pump seal. To utilize this  
function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (PM.P.S) [Configuration,  
UNIT] must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the fac-  
tory default. With this feature enabled, if the pump is not oper-  
ating, it will be started and operated for 2 seconds starting at  
14:00 hours. If the pump is operating, this routine is skipped. If  
the pump has failed and an Alarm/Alert condition is active, the  
pump will not start that day.  
If the chilled water pump interlock opens for 25 seconds  
after initially being closed is detected by the control, the appro-  
priate T194 – Cooler Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal  
Operation Alert or T195 – Cooler Pump 2 Contacts Opened  
During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the unit is  
shut down. If available, the other pump will be started. If flow  
is proven, the machine will be allowed to restart.  
If the control detects that the chilled water flow switch  
circuit is closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output  
OFF, an A202 – Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is  
Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to  
start.  
If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary  
contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is  
OFF, the appropriate T198 – Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts  
Closed While Pump Off or Alert T199 – Cooler Pump 2 Aux  
Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated. The  
chiller will not be allowed to start.  
If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit  
closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 – Cooler Pump and Aux  
Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit will  
be prevented from starting.  
The control will allow for pump changeover. Two methods  
will change the pump sequence. Before the changeover can  
occur, the unit must be at Capacity Stage 0. During changeover  
the chilled water flow switch input is ignored for 10 seconds to  
avoid a nuisance alarm.  
With Cooler Pump Select (PM.SL) [Configuration, UNIT]  
set to 0 (Automatic) and when the differential time limit Pump  
Changeover Hours (PM.DT) [Configuration, UNIT] is reached,  
the lead pump will be turned OFF. Approximately one (1) sec-  
ond later, the lag pump will start. Manual changeover can be ac-  
complished by changing Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ROT.P)  
[Configuration, UNIT] to YES only if the machine is at Capac-  
ity Stage 0 and the differential time limit Pump Changeover  
Hours (PM.DT) [Configuration, UNIT] is reached. If the  
PM.DT is not satisfied, the changeover will not occur. With the  
machine at Capacity Stage 0, the pumps would rotate automati-  
cally as part of the normal routine.  
With Cooler Pump Select (PM.SL) [Configuration, UNIT]  
set to 1 (Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First), a manual  
changeover can be accomplished by changing PM.SL only. The  
machine Remote-Off-Enable Switch must be in the OFF posi-  
tion to change this variable. The Rotate Cooler Pump Now  
(ROT.P) [Configuration, UNIT] feature does not work for these  
configuration options.  
DUAL INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a dual inte-  
gral pump package, the following options must be configured:  
• Cooler Pump Control (CPC) [Configuration, OPT1] ON.  
• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (PM1E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
YES  
• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (PM2E) [Configuration, UNIT]  
YES  
Pump Start Selection is a field-configurable choice. Cooler  
Pump Select (PM.SL) [Configuration, UNIT] is factory de-  
faulted to 0 (Automatic). This value can be changed to 1 (Pump  
1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). If PM.SL is 0 (Auto-  
matic), the pump selection is based on two criteria: the alert  
status of a pump and the operational hours on the pump. If a  
pump has an active Alert condition, it will not be considered  
for the lead pump. The pump with the lowest operational hours  
will be the lead pump. A pump is selected by the control to start  
and continues to be the lead pump until the Pump Changeover  
Hours (PM.DT) [Configuration, UNIT] is reached. The Lead  
Pump (LD.PM) [Run Status, VIEW] indicates the pump that  
has been selected as the lead pump: 1 (Pump 1), 2 (Pump 2), 3  
(No Pump). The Pump Changeover Hours is factory defaulted  
to 500 hours. Regardless of the Cooler Pump Selection, any  
pump that has an active alert will not be allowed to start.  
With the dual integral pump package, the Cooler Pump  
Starter will be energized when the machine is in an occupied  
period. As part of the factory-installed package, an auxiliary set  
of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump  
Interlock, one set for each pump to individual channels on the  
MBB. With a call for mechanical cooling, the specific pump  
interlock and flow switch are checked. If the circuits are closed,  
the machine starts its capacity routine. If Pump 1 starts and the  
auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of  
the ON command, a T190 – Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts  
Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the  
pump shut down. The unit will not be allowed to start. If the  
chilled water flow switch does not close within 1 minute, two  
alarms will be generated. A T192 – Cooler Pump 1 Failed to  
Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 – Cooler Flow/  
Interlock failed to close at Start-Up will be generated and chiller  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pumps can be  
started to maintain lubrication to the pump seal. To utilize this  
function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (PM.P.S) [Configuration,  
UNIT] must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the fac-  
tory default. If feature is enabled and the pump(s) are not  
operating, then the pumps will be operated every other day for  
2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If a pump has failed and has  
an active Alert condition, it will not be started that day.  
Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configura-  
tion of Control Method (CTRL) [Configuration, OPT2] of the  
Master chiller. The Slave chiller should always be configured  
for CTRL=0, Switch. If the chillers are to be controlled by  
Remote Contacts, both Master and Slave chillers should be  
enabled together. Two separate relays or one relay with  
two sets of contacts may control the chillers. The Enable/Off/  
Remote Contact switch should be in the Remote Contact  
position on both the Master and Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/  
Remote Contact switch should be in the Enable position for  
CTRL=2, Occupancy or CTRL=3, SCN Control.  
Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/  
Remote Contact switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency  
Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master  
chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.  
If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is  
generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in  
a Stand-Alone mode.  
Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Con-  
trol The dual chiller routine is available for the control of  
two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This  
control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement  
only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the  
other as the slave. An additional leaving fluid temperature  
thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in  
Fig. 17 and connected to the master chiller. Refer to Sensors sec-  
tion, page 4, for wiring. The SCN communication bus must be  
connected between the two chillers. Connections can be made  
to the SCN screw terminals on TB3. Refer to Sterlco Comfort  
Network Interface section, page 3, for wiring information.  
The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its  
Control Mode (STAT) [Run Status, VIEW] and its operating  
setpoint or Control Point (CTPT) [Run Status, VIEW].  
Refer to Table 21 for dual chiller configuration. In this  
example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and  
the slave chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers  
must reside on the same SCN bus (SCNB) but cannot have the  
same SCN address (SCNA) [Configuration, OPT2]. Both  
master and slave chillers must have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable  
(LLEN) [Configuration, RSET] configured to ENBL. Master/  
Slave Select (MSSL) [Configuration, RSET] must be config-  
ured to MAST for the master chiller and SLVE for the slave.  
Also in this example, the master chiller will be configured to  
use Lead/Lag Balance Select (LLBL) and Lead/Lag Balance  
Delta (LLBD) [Configuration, RSET] to even out the chiller  
run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (LLDY) [Configura-  
tion, RSET] feature will be set to 10 minutes. This will prevent  
the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller has been at  
100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Parallel config-  
uration (PARA) [Configuration, RSET] can only be config-  
ured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and LLDY are not  
used by the slave chiller.  
THERMISTOR  
WIRING*  
LEAVING  
FLUID  
MASTER  
CHILLER  
RETURN  
FLUID  
SLAVE  
CHILLER  
INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT  
LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE  
THERMISTOR (T10) HERE  
*Depending on piping sizes, use either:  
HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in. sensor/well)  
HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in. sensor/well)  
Fig. 17 Dual Chiller Thermistor Location  
Table 9 Marquee Display Menu Structure*  
RUN  
STATUS  
SERVICE  
TEST  
SET  
POINTS  
TIME  
CLOCK  
OPERATING  
MODES  
MODE  
TEMPERATURES PRESSURES  
INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION  
ALARMS  
Manual  
Mode  
On/Off  
(TEST)  
Auto  
Display  
(VIEW)  
Unit  
Temperatures  
(UNIT)  
Ckt A  
Pressures  
(PRC.A)  
Unit  
Discrete  
(GEN.I)  
Unit  
Discrete  
(GEN.O)  
Cooling  
(COOL)  
Display  
(DISP)  
Unit Time  
(TIME)  
Modes  
(MODE)  
Current  
(CRNT)  
Machine  
Hours/Starts  
(RUN)  
Unit  
Outputs  
(OUTS)  
Ckt A  
Temperatures  
(CIR.A)  
Ckt B  
Pressures  
(PRC.B)  
Head  
Pressure  
(HEAD)  
Reset  
Alarms  
(RCRN)  
Ckt A/B  
(CRCT)  
Ckt A  
(CIR.A)  
Machine  
(UNIT)  
Unit Date  
(DATE)  
Brine  
Freeze-  
point  
Daylight  
Saving  
Time  
Compressor Ckt A Comp  
Ckt B  
Temperatures  
(CIR.B)  
Unit  
Analog  
(4-20)  
Alarm  
History  
(HIST)  
Ckt B  
(CIR.B)  
Options 1  
(OPT1)  
Run Hours  
(HOUR)  
Tests  
(CMPA)  
(FRZ)  
(DST)  
Compressor Ckt B Comp  
Schedule  
Number  
(SCH.N)  
Options 2  
(OPT2)  
Starts  
Tests  
SUB-MODE  
(STRT)  
(CMPB)  
Temperature  
Reset  
(RSET)  
Local  
Schedule  
(SCH.L)  
Pump Maint.  
(PM)  
Software  
Version  
(VERS)  
Set Point  
Select  
(SLCT)  
Schedule  
Override  
(OVR)  
Service  
Configuration  
(SERV)  
Broadcast  
Configuration  
(BCST)  
LEGEND  
For example, using the language selection item:  
Language Selection (LANG) [Configuration, DISP]  
Ckt Circuit  
*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be  
described in the following format:  
Item Expansion (ITEM) [Mode Name, Sub-mode Name]  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 10 Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY  
EXPANSION  
SUB-MODE  
VIEW  
ITEM  
COMMENT  
ENTER  
EWT  
XXX.X °F  
ENTERING FLUID TEMP  
LEAVING FLUID TEMP  
ACTIVE SETPOINT  
CONTROL POINT  
LWT  
XXX.X °F  
SETP XXX.X °F  
CTPT XXX.X °F  
LOD.F  
STAT  
XXX  
X
LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR  
CONTROL MODE  
0 = Service Test  
1 = Off Local  
2 = Off SCN  
3 = Off Time  
4 = Off Emrgcy  
5 = On Local  
6 = On SCN  
7 = On Time  
8 = Ht Enabled  
9 = Pump Delay  
LD.PM  
OCC  
LEAD PUMP  
OCCUPIED  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
LS.AC  
LOW SOUND ACTIVE  
OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT  
PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY  
REQUESTED STAGE  
CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS  
TIME OF DAY  
MODE YES/NO  
CAP  
STGE  
ALRM  
TIME  
XXX %  
X
XXX  
XX.XX  
XX  
00.00-23.59  
1 = January, 2 = February, etc.  
01-31  
MNTH  
DATE  
YEAR  
MONTH OF YEAR  
XX  
DAY OF MONTH  
XX  
YEAR OF THE CENTURY  
MACHINE OPERATING HOURS  
MACHINE STARTS  
RUN  
ENTER  
HRS.U XXXX HRS  
STR.U  
HR.P1  
HR.P2  
XXXX  
XXXX.X  
XXXX.X  
PUMP 1 RUN HOURS  
PUMP 2 RUN HOURS  
CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS  
HOUR  
ENTER  
HRS.A XXXX HRS  
HRS.B XXXX HRS  
HR.A1 XXXX HRS  
HR.A2 XXXX HRS  
HR.B1 XXXX HRS  
HR.B2 XXXX HRS  
CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS  
See Note  
COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS  
COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS  
COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS  
COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS  
COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS  
COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS  
COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS  
COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS  
PUMP MAINTENANCE  
See Note  
See Note  
STRT  
ENTER  
ST.A1  
ST.A2  
ST.B1  
ST.B2  
PUMP  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
See Note  
See Note  
PM  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SI.PM  
P.1.DN  
P.2.DN  
P.1.MN  
P.2.MN  
XXXX HRS  
XXXX HRS  
XXXX HRS  
YES/NO  
PUMP SERVICE INTERVAL  
PUMP 1 SERVICE COUNTDOWN  
PUMP 2 SERVICE COUNTDOWN  
PUMP 1 MAINTENANCE DONE  
PUMP 2 MAINTENANCE DONE  
User Entry  
User Entry  
YES/NO  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 10 Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY  
EXPANSION  
SUB-MODE  
PM (cont)  
ITEM  
COMMENT  
PMDT  
PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES  
ENTER  
P.1.M0  
P.1.M1  
P.1.M2  
P.1.M3  
P.1.M4  
P.2.M0  
P.2.M1  
P.2.M2  
P.2.M3  
P.2.M4  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
ENTER  
ENTER  
STRN  
STRAINER MAINTENANCE  
STRAINER SRVC INTERVAL  
STRAINER SRVC COUNTDOWN  
STRAINER MAINT. DONE  
STRAINER MAINT. DATES  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
SI.ST  
S.T.DN  
S.T.MN  
ST.DT  
XXXX HRS  
XXXX HRS  
YES/NO  
User Entry  
ENTER  
S.T.M0  
S.T.M1  
S.T.M2  
S.T.M3  
S.T.M4  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
ENTER  
ENTER  
COIL  
COIL MAINTENANCE  
COIL SRVC INTER  
SI.CL  
C.L.DN  
C.L.MN  
CL.DT  
XXXX HRS  
XXXX HRS  
YES/NO  
COIL SERVICE COUNTDOWN  
COIL MAINT. DONE  
COIL MAINTENANCE DATES  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
User Entry  
ENTER  
C.L.M0  
C.L.M1  
C.L.M2  
C.L.M3  
C.L.M4  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
MM/DD/YY HH:MM  
VERS  
ENTER  
MBB  
MARQ  
EMM  
NAVI  
CESR-131279-xx-xx  
CESR-131171-xx-xx  
CESR-131174-xx-xx  
CESR-131227-xx-xx  
xx-xx is Version number*  
xx-xx is Version number*  
xx-xx is Version number*  
xx-xx is Version number*  
*Press  
ENTER  
and  
ESCAPE  
simultaneously to obtain version number.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 11 Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
TEST  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
ON/OFF  
SERVICE TEST MODE  
To Enable Service Test Mode,  
move Enable/Off/Remote  
Contact switch to OFF. Change  
TEST to ON. Move switch to  
ENABLE.  
ENTER  
OUTS  
OUTPUTS AND PUMPS  
FAN 1 RELAY  
ENTER  
FAN1  
FAN2  
CLP.1  
CLP.2  
CL.HT  
RMT.A  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
FAN 2 RELAY  
COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY  
COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY  
COOLER/PUMP HEATER  
REMOTE ALARM RELAY  
CMPA  
CMPB  
CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST  
COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY  
ENTER  
CC.A1  
CC.A2  
MLV  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY  
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST  
COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY  
See Note  
ENTER  
CC.B1  
CC.B2  
MLV  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
Table 12 Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
UNIT  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS  
ENTER  
CEWT  
CLWT  
OAT  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
COOLER ENTERING FLUID  
COOLER LEAVING FLUID  
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE  
SPACE TEMPERATURE  
SPT  
DLWT  
LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID  
CIR.A  
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A  
ENTER  
SCT.A  
SST.A  
RGT.A  
SH.A  
SATURATED CONDENSING TMP  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X ^F  
SATURATED SUCTION TEMP  
COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP  
SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP  
CIR.B  
TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B  
See Note  
See Note  
ENTER  
SCT.B  
SST.B  
RGT.B  
SH.B  
SATURATED CONDENSING TMP  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X ^F  
SATURATED SUCTION TEMP  
COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP  
SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP  
See Note  
See Note  
See Note  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 13 Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
PRC.A  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
PRESSURES CIRCUIT A  
ENTER  
DP.A  
SP.A  
XXX.X PSIG  
XXX.X PSIG  
DISCHARGE PRESSURE  
SUCTION PRESSURE  
PRC.B  
PRESSURES CIRCUIT B  
DISCHARGE PRESSURE  
See Note  
See Note  
ENTER  
DP.B  
SP.B  
XXX.X PSIG  
XXX.X PSIG  
SUCTION PRESSURE  
See Note  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
Table 14 Set Point and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
COOL  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
COOLING SETPOINTS  
ENTER  
CSP.1  
CSP.2  
CSP.3  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
COOLING SETPOINT 1  
Default: 44 F  
Default: 44 F  
Default: 32 F  
COOLING SETPOINT 2  
ICE SETPOINT  
HEAD  
FRZ  
HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS  
CALCULATED HP SETPOINT A  
Default: 113 F  
(Read Only)  
ENTER  
HD.P.A  
HD.P.B  
XXX.X °F  
Default: 113 F  
(Read Only)  
XXX.X °F  
CALCULATED HP SETPOINT B  
BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT  
BRINE FREEZE POINT  
ENTER  
BR.FZ  
Default: 34 F  
XXX.X °F  
Table 15 Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
GEN.I  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
GENERAL INPUTS  
ENTER  
STST  
FLOW  
PM.F.1  
STRT/STOP  
ON/OFF  
START/STOP SWITCH  
COOLER FLOW SWITCH  
COOLER PUMP 1 INTERLOCK  
OPEN/CLSE  
1 = Pump 1  
2 = Pump 2  
3 = No Pump  
LD.PM  
X
Lead Pump  
PM.F.2  
HT.RQ  
DLS1  
DLS2  
ICED  
OPEN/CLSE  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COOLER PUMP 2 INTERLOCK  
HEAT REQUEST  
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1  
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2  
ICE DONE  
DUAL  
DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH  
CRCT  
CIRCUITS INPUTS  
ENTER  
FKA1  
FKA2  
FKB1  
FKB2  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK  
COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK  
COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK  
COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK  
See Note  
See Note  
4-20  
4-20 MA INPUTS  
ENTER  
DMND  
RSET  
CSP  
XX.X MA  
XX.X MA  
XX.X MA  
4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL  
4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL  
4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 16 Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
GEN.O  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
GENERAL OUTPUTS  
ENTER  
FAN1  
FAN2  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
FAN 1 RELAY  
FAN 2 RELAY  
C.WP1  
C.WP2  
CLHT  
MLV.R  
COOLER PUMP RELAY 1  
COOLER PUMP RELAY 2  
COOLER/PUMP HEATER  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY  
CIR.A  
CIR.B  
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A  
ENTER  
ENTER  
CC.A1  
CC.A2  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY  
COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY  
OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B  
See Note  
CC.B1  
CC.B2  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY  
COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
Table 17 Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
DISP  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION  
ENTER  
TEST  
ON/OFF  
TEST DISPLAY LEDS  
METR  
LANG  
ON/OFF  
X
METRIC DISPLAY  
Off = English; On = Metric  
LANGUAGE SELECTION  
Default: 0  
0 = English  
1 = Espanol  
2 = Francais  
3 = Portuguese  
PAS.E  
PASS  
ENBL/DSBL  
xxxx  
PASSWORD ENABLE  
SERVICE PASSWORD  
UNIT  
ENTER  
UNIT CONFIGURATION  
COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE  
SZA.1  
XX  
Unit Size  
60 Hz  
50 Hz  
010  
015  
018  
022  
025  
030  
032  
035  
040  
042  
045  
050  
055  
10  
15  
9
11  
7
9
9
11  
13  
8
13  
11  
13  
13  
15  
9
13  
10  
13  
15  
SZA.2  
XX  
COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE  
Unit Size  
60 Hz  
50 Hz  
015  
018  
022  
025  
030  
032  
035  
040  
042  
045  
050  
055  
9
7
9
13  
13  
15  
13  
13  
13  
13  
15  
11  
13  
11  
13  
11  
13  
SZB.1  
XX  
XX  
COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE  
Unit Size  
60 Hz  
50 Hz  
032  
035  
040  
042  
045  
050  
055  
15  
15  
10  
13  
15  
13  
13  
11  
13  
SZB.2  
SH.SP  
COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE  
SUPERHEAT SETPOINT  
Unit Size  
60 Hz  
50 Hz  
042  
045  
050  
055  
13  
13  
15  
11  
13  
XX.X F  
Default: 15 °F  
REFG  
FAN.S  
X
REFRIGERANT  
1 = R-22  
FAN STAGING SELECT  
1 = One Fan (010-018)  
2 = Two Fans (022-030)  
3 = Three Fans (032-040)  
4 = Four Fans (042-055)  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 17 Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)  
KEYPAD  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
OPT1  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
ENTRY  
EXPANSION  
UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE  
COOLER FLUID  
FLUD  
X
Default: Water  
ENTER  
1 = Water  
2 = Medium Temperature Brine  
MLV.S  
MMR.S  
RG.EN  
CPC  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT  
MOTORMASTER SELECT  
ENBL/DSBL  
ON/OFF  
RETURN GAS SENSOR ENABLE  
COOLER PUMP CONTROL  
COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE  
COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE  
Default: DISABLED  
Default: On  
PM1E  
PM2E  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
PM.P.S  
PM.SL  
YES/NO  
X
COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT  
COOLER PUMP SELECT  
Default: No  
Default: Automatic  
0 = Automatic  
1 = Pump 1 Starts first  
2 = Pump 2 Starts first  
PM.DY  
PM.DT  
ROT.P  
EMM  
XX MIN  
XXXX HRS  
YES/NO  
COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY  
PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS  
ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW  
EMM MODULE INSTALLED  
0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1 min.  
Default: 500 hours  
User Entry  
YES/NO  
OPT2  
UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS  
CONTROL METHOD  
CTRL  
X
Default: Switch  
ENTER  
0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch  
2 = Occupancy  
3 = SCN Control  
Default: 1  
Range: 1 to 239  
SCNA  
XXX  
SCN ADDRESS  
Default: 0  
SCNB  
XXX  
X
SCN BUS NUMBER  
Range: 0 to 239  
BAUD  
SCN BAUD RATE  
Default: 9600  
1 = 2400  
2 = 4800  
3 = 9600  
4 = 19,200  
5 = 38,400  
LOAD  
LLCS  
X
X
LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT  
LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT  
Default: Equal  
1 = Equal  
2 = Staged  
Default: Automatic  
1 = Automatic  
2 = Circuit A Leads  
3 = Circuit B Leads  
Default: 60  
LCWT  
DELY  
XX.X F  
XX  
HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT  
MINUTES OFF TIME  
°
F
Range: 2 to 60  
Default: 0 Minutes  
Range: 0 to 15 Minutes  
ICE.M  
CLS.C  
LS.MD  
ENBL/DSBL  
ENBL/DSBL  
X
ICE MODE ENABLE  
Default: Disable  
Default: Disable  
CLOSE CONTROL SELECT  
LOW SOUND MODE SELECT  
Default: 0  
0 = Mode Disable  
1 = Fan Noise Only  
2 = Fan/Compressor Noise  
LS.ST  
LS.ND  
LS.LT  
00:00  
00:00  
LOW SOUND START TIME  
LOW SOUND END TIME  
Default: 00:00  
Default: 00:00  
Default: 100%  
Range: 0 to 100%  
XXX %  
LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT  
RSET  
RESET COOL TEMP  
CRST  
X
COOLING RESET TYPE  
Default: No Reset  
0 = No Reset  
ENTER  
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input  
2 = Outdoor Air Temperature  
3 = Return Fluid  
4 = Space Temperature  
Default: 0.0  
F
MA.DG  
RM.NO  
XX.X F  
4-20 - DEGREES RESET  
F
Range: 30 to 30  
Default: 125 F (51.7 C)  
Range: 0° to 125 F  
XXX.X °F  
REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 17 Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
RSET (cont)  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
Default: 0.0 F (-17.8 C)  
EXPANSION  
°
RM.F  
XXX.X °F  
REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP  
°
0
Range:  
to 125 F  
°
Default: 0.0  
F
RM.DG  
RT.NO  
RT.F  
XX.X °F  
XXX.X F  
XXX.X F  
REMOTE - DEGREES RESET  
RETURN - NO RESET TEMP  
RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP  
Range: 30 to 30 F  
Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C)  
°
0
Range:  
to 125 F COOLER  
T
Default: 0.0 F (0.0 C)  
°
0
Range:  
to 125 F COOLER  
T
°
Default: 0.0  
F
RT.DG  
DMDC  
XX.X °F  
RETURN - DEGREES RESET  
DEMAND LIMIT SELECT  
Range: 30 to 30 F (34.4 to -1.1 C)  
X
Default: None  
0 = None  
1 = Switch  
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input  
3 = SCN Loadshed  
Default: 100%  
DM20  
SHNM  
SHDL  
SHTM  
DLS1  
DLS2  
LLEN  
MSSL  
XXX %  
XXX  
DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA  
LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER  
LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA  
MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME  
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1  
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2  
LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE  
MASTER/SLAVE SELECT  
Range: 0 to 100%  
Default: 0  
Range: 0 to 99  
Default: 0%  
Range: 0 to 60%  
XXX %  
Default: 60 minutes  
Range: 0 to 120 minutes  
XXX  
Default: 80%  
Range: 0 to 100%  
XXX %  
Default: 50%  
Range: 0 to 100%  
XXX %  
ENBL/DSBL  
SLVE/MAST  
Default: Disable  
Default: Master  
Default: 2  
SLVA  
LLBL  
XXX  
X
SLAVE ADDRESS  
Range: 0 to 239  
LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT  
Default: Master Leads  
0 = Master Leads  
1 = Slave Leads  
2 = Automatic  
ENTER  
Default: 168 hours  
LLBD  
LLDY  
PARA  
XXX  
XXX  
YES  
LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA  
LAG START DELAY  
Range: 40 to 400 hours  
Default: 5 minutes  
Range: 0 to 30 minutes  
PARALLEL CONFIGURATION  
Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED)  
SLCT  
SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD  
COOLING SETPOINT SELECT  
CLSP  
X
Default: Single  
0 = Single  
1 = Dual Switch  
2 = Dual SCN Occupied  
3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires  
EMM)  
ENTER  
RL.S  
CRMP  
SCHD  
Z.GN  
ENBL/DSBL  
RAMP LOAD SELECT  
COOLING RAMP LOADING  
SCHEDULE NUMBER  
Default: Enable  
Default: 1.0  
Range: 0.2 to 2.0  
X.X  
XX  
Default: 1  
Range: 1 to 99  
Default: 2.0  
Range: 1.0 to 4.0  
X.X  
DEADBAND MULTIPLIER  
SERV  
SERVICE CONFIGURATION  
ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1  
ENTER  
EN.A1  
EN.A2  
EN.B1  
EN.B2  
ENBL/DSBL  
ENBL/DSBL  
ENBL/DSBL  
ENBL/DSBL  
Unit dependent  
Unit dependent  
Unit dependent  
Unit dependent  
ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2  
ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1  
ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2  
BCST  
BROADCAST CONFIGURATION  
ENTER  
T.D.BC  
OAT.B  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
SCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST  
SCN OAT BROADCAST  
GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST  
SCN BROADCAST ACKER  
G.S.BC  
BC.AK  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 18 Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
TIME  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
SUB-ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
TIME OF DAY  
ENTER  
HH.MM  
XX.XX  
HOUR AND MINUTE  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
DATE  
MONTH,DATE,DAY AND YEAR  
MONTH OF YEAR  
ENTER  
MNTH  
DOM  
DAY  
XX  
XX  
1-12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc)  
Range: 01-31  
DAY OF MONTH  
DAY OF WEEK  
X
1-7 (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc)  
YEAR  
XXXX  
YEAR OF CENTURY  
DST  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME  
MONTH  
ENTER  
STR.M  
STR.W  
STR.D  
MIN.A  
STP.M  
STP.W  
STP.D  
MIN.5  
XX  
X
Default: 4, Range 1 12  
Default: 1, Range 1 5  
Default: 7, Range 1 7  
Default: 60, Range 0 99  
Default: 10, Range 1 12  
Default: 5, Range 1 5  
Default: 7, Range 1 7  
WEEK  
X
DAY  
MINUTES TO ADD  
MONTH  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
WEEK  
DAY  
XX  
XX  
MINUTES TO SUBTRACT  
Default: 60, Range 0 99  
SCH.N  
SCH.L  
SCHEDULE NUMBER  
Default: 1, Range 1 99  
LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE  
ENTER  
ENTER  
PER.1  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
OCC.1  
UNC.1  
MON.1  
TUE.1  
WED.1  
THU.1  
FRI.1  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.1  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.1  
HOL.1  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
ENTER  
ENTER  
PER.2  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
OCC.2  
UNC.2  
MON.2  
TUE.2  
WED.2  
THU.2  
FRI.2  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.2  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.2  
HOL.2  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 18 Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
EXPANSION  
SUB-MODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
SUB-ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
SCH.L (cont)  
ENTER  
PER.3  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3  
ENTER  
OCC.3  
UNC.3  
MON.3  
TUE.3  
WED.3  
THU.3  
FRI.3  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.3  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.3  
HOL.3  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
ENTER  
ENTER  
PER.4  
PER.5  
PER.6  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
OCC.4  
UNC.4  
MON.4  
TUE.4  
WED.4  
THU.4  
FRI.4  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.4  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.4  
HOL.4  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
ENTER  
ENTER  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
OCC.5  
UNC.5  
MON.5  
TUE.5  
WED.5  
THU.5  
FRI.5  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.5  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.5  
HOL.5  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
ENTER  
ENTER  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
OCC.6  
UNC.6  
MON.6  
TUE.6  
WED.6  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 18 Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
EXPANSION  
SUB-MODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
SUB-ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
SCH.L (cont)  
THU.6  
YES/NO  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRI.6  
SAT.6  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.6  
HOL.6  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
ENTER  
ENTER  
PER.7  
OCC.7  
UNC.7  
MON.7  
TUE.7  
WED.7  
THU.7  
FRI.7  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.7  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.7  
HOL.7  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8  
PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME  
PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME  
MONDAY IN PERIOD  
ENTER  
ENTER  
PER.8  
OCC.8  
UNC.8  
MON.8  
TUE.8  
WED.8  
THU.8  
FRI.8  
XX:XX  
XX.XX  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
Military (00:00 23:59)  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
TUESDAY IN PERIOD  
WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD  
THURSDAY IN PERIOD  
FRIDAY IN PERIOD  
SAT.8  
SATURDAY IN PERIOD  
SUNDAY IN PERIOD  
SUN.8  
HOL.8  
HOLIDAY IN PERIOD  
OVR  
SCHEDULE OVERRIDE  
ENTER  
OVR.T  
OVR.L  
T.OVR  
X
X
TIMED OVERRIDE HOURS  
Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours  
Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours  
User Entry  
OVERRIDE TIME LIMIT  
TIMED OVERRIDE  
YES/NO  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 19 Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
MODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
MODES CONTROLLING UNIT  
ENTER  
MD01  
MD02  
MD03  
MD05  
MD06  
MD07  
MD08  
MD09  
MD10  
MD13  
MD14  
MD15  
MD16  
MD17  
MD18  
MD19  
MD20  
MD21  
MD22  
MD23  
MD24  
MD25  
MD26  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
FSM CONTROLLING CHILLER  
WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER  
MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL  
RAMP LOAD LIMITED  
TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT  
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA  
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB  
SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE  
MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE  
DUAL SETPOINT  
TEMPERATURE RESET  
DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED  
COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION  
LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING  
HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING  
MAKING ICE  
STORING ICE  
HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A  
HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B  
MINIMUM COMP ON TIME  
PUMP OFF DELAY TIME  
LOW SOUND MODE  
SHORT LOOP OVERRIDE  
LEGEND  
FSM  
SCT  
WSM  
FlotronicSystem Manager  
Saturated Condensing Temperature  
Water System Manager  
Table 20 Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
CRNT  
ITEM  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
Alarms are shown as AXXX.  
Alerts are shown as TXXX.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
AXXX OR TXXX  
YES/NO  
CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS  
RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS  
ALARM HISTORY  
RCRN  
HIST  
Alarms are shown as AXXX.  
Alerts are shown as TXXX.  
AXXX OR TXXX  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 21 Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)  
SUB-MODE  
ITEM  
KEYPAD ENTRY  
DISPLAY  
ITEM EXPANSION  
COMMENTS  
DISP  
UNIT  
OPT1  
OPT2  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
CTRL  
0
CONTROL METHOD  
SWITCH  
CTRL  
SCNA  
SCNB  
DEFAULT 0  
DEFAULT 1  
DEFAULT 0  
CTRL  
SCNA  
1
SCN ADDRESS  
SCNA  
SCNB  
0
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
ESCAPE  
SCN BUS NUMBER  
SCNB  
OPT2  
RSET  
CRST  
LLEN  
DSBL  
DSBL  
ENBL  
ENBL  
LLEN  
MSSL  
MAST  
MSSL  
SLVA  
0
PROCEED TO  
SUBMODE RESET  
RSET  
ENTER  
COOLING RESET TYPE  
LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE  
15 ITEMS  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
SELECT ENBL  
LLEN  
LLEN  
MSSL  
SLVA  
SLVA  
LLBL  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE  
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
ESCAPE  
MASTER /SLAVE SELECT  
MASTER /SLAVE SELECT  
ENTER  
DEFAULT MAST  
ESCAPE  
SLAVE ADDRESS  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
SELECT 2  
0
2
ENTER  
2
SLAVE ADDRESS  
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
ESCAPE  
SLVA  
LLBL  
0
LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
0
2
SELECT 2 - Automatic  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 21 Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)  
SUB-MODE  
ITEM  
KEYPAD ENTRY  
DISPLAY  
ITEM EXPANSION  
COMMENTS  
RSET  
LLBL  
ENTER  
2
LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT  
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
ESCAPE  
LLBL  
LLBD  
168  
LLBD  
LLDY  
5
LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA  
LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA  
LLBD  
LLDY  
LLDY  
PARA  
ENTER  
DEFAULT 168  
ESCAPE  
LAG START DELAY  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
SELECT 10  
5
10  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
ESCAPE  
ENTER  
10  
LAG START DELAY  
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
LLDY  
RSET  
YES  
MASTER COMPLETE  
NOTES:  
1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-SCN.  
2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22 Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)  
SUB-MODE  
ITEM  
KEYPAD ENTRY  
DISPLAY  
ITEM EXPANSION  
COMMENTS  
DISP  
UNIT  
OPT1  
OPT2  
ENTER  
CTRL  
0
CONTROL METHOD  
SWITCH  
CTRL  
DEFAULT 0  
ESCAPE  
CTRL  
CTRL  
SCNA  
1
SCNA  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SCN ADDRESS  
SCN ADDRESS  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
1
SELECT 2  
(SEE NOTE 1)  
2
SCNA  
ENTER  
2
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
ESCAPE  
SCNA  
SCNB  
0
DEFAULT 0  
(SEE NOTE 2)  
SCNB  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
ESCAPE  
SCN BUS NUMBER  
SCNB  
OPT2  
RSET  
CRST  
LLEN  
DSBL  
DSBL  
ENBL  
ENBL  
LLEN  
MSSL  
MAST  
MAST  
SLVE  
SLVE  
MSSL  
RSET  
PROCEED TO  
SUBMODE RSET  
RSET  
ENTER  
COOLING RESET TYPE  
LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE  
15 ITEMS  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
SELECT ENBL  
LLEN  
LLEN  
MSSL  
MSSL  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE  
MASTER /SLAVE SELECT  
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
ESCAPE  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SCROLLING STOPS  
VALUE FLASHES  
SELECT SLVE  
ENTER  
ESCAPE  
ESCAPE  
MASTER /SLAVE SELECT  
CHANGE ACCEPTED  
SLAVE COMPLETE  
NOTES:  
1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.  
2. Slave SCN Address (SCNA) must be different than Master.  
3. Slave SCN Bus Number (SCNB) must be the same as Master  
4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 23 Operating Modes  
MODE  
NO.  
ITEM EXPANSION  
DESCRIPTION  
01  
02  
03  
FSM CONTROLLING CHILLER  
WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER  
MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL  
RAMP LOAD LIMITED  
FlotronicSystem Manager (FSM) is controlling the chiller.  
Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller.  
Dual Chiller control is enabled.  
Rampload(pull-down)limitingineffect.Inthismode,therateatwhichleavingfluidtemperature  
isdroppedislimitedtoapredeterminedvaluetopreventcompressoroverloading. SeeCooling  
Ramp Loading (CRMP) [Configuration, SLCT]. The pull-down limit can be modified, if desired,  
to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.  
05  
06  
TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT  
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA  
Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed  
schedule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under  
Local (Enable) or SCN (Sterlco Comfort Network) control. Override expires after each use.  
Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-  
urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If  
the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (BR.FZ) [Set Point,  
FRZ] minus 3° F (1.7° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F (7.8° C)  
for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suc-  
tion temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (BR.FZ) [Set Point, FRZ] minus 14° F  
(7.8 º C), for 90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control  
will continue to decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.  
07  
08  
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB  
SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE  
Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-  
urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If  
the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (BR.FZ) [Set Point,  
FRZ] minus 3° F (1.7° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F (7.8° C)  
for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suc-  
tion temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (BR.FZ) [Set Point, FRZ] minus 14° F  
(7.8° C), for 90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will  
continue to decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.  
Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving  
towards the control point.  
09  
10  
MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE  
DUAL SETPOINT  
Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (DELY) [Configuration, OPT2].  
Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (CSP.1) [Set Point,  
COOL] during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (CSP.2) [Set Point, COOL] during  
unoccupied periods.  
13  
TEMPERATURE RESET  
Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leav-  
ing fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point  
can be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to  
20 mA signal.  
14  
DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED  
Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by  
demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to pro-  
duce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs  
or a 4 to 20 mA signal.  
15  
COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION  
LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING  
HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING  
Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section  
for definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the  
Freeze point.  
16  
17  
18  
Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and  
decreasing faster than -0.5° F per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point  
exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.  
Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.  
Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically  
load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.  
MAKING ICE  
STORING ICE  
Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (CSP.3) [Set Point, COOL]  
to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.  
19  
20  
Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (CSP.2) [Set Point  
COOL]. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.  
HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A  
Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than  
the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity  
may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con-  
densing temperature.  
21  
HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B  
Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than  
the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity  
may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con-  
densing temperature.  
22  
23  
MINIMUM COMP ON TIME  
Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure  
proper oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop  
volume.  
PUMP OFF DELAY TIME  
LOW SOUND MODE  
Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set  
by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (PM.DY) [Configuration, OPT1].  
24  
25  
Chiller operates at higher condensing temperature and/or reduced  
capacity to minimize overall unit noise during evening/night hours (user-configurable).  
SHORT LOOP OVERRIDE  
Chiller is monitoring how fast compressor(s) is being cycled to maintain the desired leaving  
fluid temperature. Control is limiting the rate of compressor cycling when this mode is active  
to ensure proper oil return and also to prevent premature compressor failure. Low loop vol-  
ume, low cooler flow and/or low chiller load are the primary causes for this mode.  
26  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 24 Example of Reading and Clearing Alarms  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
SUB-MODE  
CRNT  
ITEM  
ITEM EXPANSION  
COMMENT  
ACTIVE ALARMS (AXXX) OR  
ALERTS (TXXX) DISPLAYED.  
ENTER  
AXXX or TXXX  
CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS  
ESCAPE  
CRNT  
NO  
NO  
Use to clear active alarms/alerts  
NO Flashes  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RCRN  
YES  
NO  
Select YES  
Alarms/alerts clear, YES changes to NO  
Table 25A 4-20 mA Reset  
KEYPAD  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
SUB-MODE  
RSET  
ITEM  
COMMENT  
ENTRY  
EXPANSION  
0 = no reset  
1 = 4 to 20 mA input  
2 = Outdoor air temp  
3 = Return Fluid  
COOLING RESET  
ENTER  
CRST  
1
TYPE  
4 = Space Temperature  
NO COOL RESET  
Default: 125 F (51.7 C)  
CRT1  
CRT2  
DGRC  
4.0  
TEMP  
Range: 0° to 125 F  
FULL COOL  
RESET TEMP  
DEGREES COOL  
RESET  
Default: 0° F (17.8 C)  
Range: 0° to 125 F  
Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA  
Range: 30 to 30 F (16.7 to 16.7 C)  
20.0  
5.0 F  
(2.8 C)  
NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4-20 mA reset. No reset will occur  
at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0 F reset will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM is required.  
Table 25B Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control  
MODE  
(RED LED)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
EXPANSION  
SUB-MODE  
DISP  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
ENTER  
UNIT  
OPT1  
OPT2  
RSET  
CONFIGURATION  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SLCT  
CLSP  
0
0
0
4
4
COOLING SETPOINT SELECT  
Scrolling Stops  
Flashing 0’  
Select 4’  
ENTER  
Change Accepted  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 26A Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset  
DISPLAY  
MODE  
(RED LED)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
SUB-  
MODE  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
EXPANSION  
ITEM  
COMMENT  
Outdoor  
Air  
Space  
ENTER  
DISP  
UNIT  
OPT1  
OPT2  
2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature  
4 = Space Temperature  
(Connect to TB5-5,6)  
ENTER  
COOLING RESET  
TYPE  
CONFIGURATION  
RSET  
CRST  
2
4
REMOTE - NO  
RESET TEMP  
Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C)  
RM.NO*  
RM.F  
85 °F  
72 °F  
Range: 0° to125 F  
REMOTE - FULL  
RESET TEMP  
Default: 0.0° F (-17.7 C)  
Range: 0° to 125 F  
55 °F  
68 °F  
Default: 0° F (0° C)  
Range: 30 to 30 F  
(34.4 to -1.1 °C)  
REMOTE - DEGREES  
RESET  
RM.DG  
15 °F  
6 °F  
*4 items skipped in this example.  
Table 26B Configuring Return Temperature Reset  
MODE  
(RED LED)  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
SUB-MODE  
DISP  
ITEM  
TEST  
TYPE  
FLUD  
CTRL  
DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ON/OFF  
TEST DISPLAY LEDs  
UNIT TYPE  
UNIT  
X
X
X
OPT1  
COOLER FLUID  
CONTROL METHOD  
OPT2  
0 = No Reset  
ENTER  
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)  
(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3)  
CONFIGURATION  
RSET  
CRST  
X
COOLING RESET TYPE 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature  
3 = Return Fluid  
4 = Space Temperature  
(Connect to TB5-5,6)  
RETURN FLUID - NO  
RESET TEMP  
Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C)  
RT.NO* XXX.X F  
RT.F XXX.X F  
RT.DG XX.X F  
Range: 0° to125 F COOLER T  
RETURN FLUID - FULL Default: 0 F (17.8 C)  
RESET TEMP  
Range: 0° to 125 F COOLER T  
RETURN - DEGREES  
RESET  
Default: 0 F (0 C)  
Range: 30 to 30°F (16.7 to 16.7 C)  
*4 items skipped in this example.  
To use Outdoor Air or Space Temperature reset, four vari-  
ables must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the  
sub-mode RSET, items CRST, RM.NO, RM.F and RT.DG  
must be properly set. See Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor  
Air and Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air reset exam-  
ple provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0 F  
(29.4 C) outdoor-air temperature and 15.0 F (8.3 C) reset at  
55.0 F (12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. The space tempera-  
ture reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point  
reset at 72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0 F (3.3 C)  
reset at 68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. The variable CRST  
should be configured for the type of reset desired. The variable  
RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should  
occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the temperature that  
maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG should be set  
to the maximum amount of reset desired.  
Temperature Reset The control system is capable of  
handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler  
fluid temperature. Because the change in temperature through  
the cooler is a measure of the building load, the return tempera-  
ture reset is in effect an average building load reset method.  
The control system is also capable of temperature reset based  
on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or  
from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. Accessory sen-  
sors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The Energy  
Management Module (EMM) must be used for temperature  
reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 25A and 25B.  
IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with  
other control systems due to possible power supply differ-  
ences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Con-  
nection of control devices with different power supplies  
may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink™ controls  
incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A  
signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal gen-  
erator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.  
To use Return reset, four variables must be configured. In  
the Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items  
CRST, RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See  
Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This ex-  
ample provides 5.0 F (2.8 C) chilled water set point reset at  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.0 F (1.1 C) cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10.0 F (5.6 C)  
cooler T. The variable RT.NO should be set to the cooler  
temperature difference (T) where no chilled water tempera-  
ture reset should occur. The variable RT.F should be set to the  
cooler temperature difference where the maximum chilled wa-  
ter temperature reset should occur. The variable RM.DG  
should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired.  
To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run  
Status mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the active set point  
(SETP) from the control point (CTPT) to determine the degrees  
reset.  
Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant  
leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled  
fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler  
fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 18.  
Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point  
are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the flu-  
id temperature set point may be colder than required. If the  
leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load,  
the efficiency of the machine would increase.  
LEGEND  
LWT Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature  
Fig. 19 Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset  
Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature  
set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid  
temperature or, in effect, the building load.  
Figures 19 and 20 are examples of outdoor air and space  
temperature resets.  
LEGEND  
LWT Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature  
Fig. 20 Space Temperature Reset  
configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (DLS1 and DLS2)  
[Configuration, RSET] to the desired capacity limit. See  
Table 27. Capacity steps are controlled by 2 relay switch inputs  
field wired to TB6 as shown in Fig. 4-6.  
For Demand Limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the  
first stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first de-  
mand limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of ca-  
pacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point. Closing  
contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit  
from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch  
2 set point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest de-  
mand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If  
the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the  
unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.  
LEGEND  
Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature  
Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature  
EWT  
LWT  
Fig. 18 Standard Chilled Fluid  
Temperature Control No Reset  
Demand Limit Demand Limit is a feature that allows  
the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy us-  
age. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be config-  
ured. The first type is through 2-stage switch control, which will  
reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentag-  
es. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will re-  
duce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA  
input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level  
at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CNN Loadshed  
module and has the ability to limit the current operating capaci-  
ty to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.  
NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4- to 20-mA input sig-  
nal types of demand limiting require the Energy Management  
Module (EMM).  
To use Demand Limit, select the type of demand limiting to  
use. Then configure the Demand Limit set points based on the  
type selected.  
To disable demand limit configure the DMDC to 0. See  
Table 27.  
EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to  
20 mA Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for 4 to 20  
mA control set the Demand Limit Select (DMDC) [Configura-  
tion, RSET] to 2. Then configure the Demand Limit at 20 mA  
(DM20) [Configuration, RSET] to the maximum loadshed val-  
ue desired. Connect the output from an externally powered 4 to  
20 mA signal to terminal block TB6, terminals 1 and 5. Refer  
to the unit wiring diagram for these connections to the optional/  
accessory Energy Management Module and terminal block.  
The control will reduce allowable capacity to this level for the  
20 mA signal. See Table 27 and Fig. 21A.  
DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To con-  
figure Demand Limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand  
Limit Select (DMDC) [Configuration, RSET] to 1. Then  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA  
80  
60  
40  
100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA  
75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA  
20  
0
0
2
6
8
12  
16  
18  
4
20  
10  
14  
DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL 4 - 20 mA INPUT  
Fig. 21A 4- to 20-mA Demand Limiting  
Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is  
set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed con-  
trol send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink control will  
reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed  
Demand delta. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum  
length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The  
control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no Can-  
cel command has been received within the configured maxi-  
mum loadshed time limit.  
Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-  
turer’s control systems, due to possible power supply  
differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.  
The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.  
ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A sig-  
nal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge  
signal generating device is used.  
Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) A field supplied  
and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be  
used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. Connect  
the signal to TB6-3,5 (+,–). See Table 27 for instructions to  
enable the function. Figure 21B shows how the 4 to 20 mA sig-  
nal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for  
fluid types (FLUD) 1 or 2 [Configuration, OPT1]. The set point  
will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the  
chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.  
DEMAND LIMIT (SCN Loadshed Controlled) — To con-  
figure Demand Limit for SCN Loadshed control set the De-  
mand Limit Select (DMDC) [Configuration, RSET] to 3. Then  
configure the Loadshed Group Number (SHNM), Loadshed  
Demand Delta (SHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time  
(SHTM) [Configuration, RSET]. See Table 27.  
The Loadshed Group number is established by the SCN  
system designer. The ComfortLink control will respond to a  
Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the  
100  
(38)  
90  
(32)  
80  
(27)  
70  
(21)  
MAXIMUM  
SET POINT  
70 F (21.1 C)  
60  
(15)  
50  
(10)  
40  
(4.4)  
(FLUD = 1) MINIMUM  
SET POINT 38 F (3.3 C)  
30  
(-1)  
20  
(-7)  
(FLUD = 2) MINIMUM  
SET POINT 14 F (-10 C)  
10  
(-12)  
0
(-17)  
4
6.3  
8.6  
10.9  
13.1  
15.4  
17.7  
20  
4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM  
EMM Energy Management Module  
Fig. 21B Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 27 Configuring Demand Limit  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
KEYPAD  
MODE  
SUB-MODE  
DISP  
ITEM  
TEST  
TYPE  
FLUD  
CTRL  
CRST  
DISPLAY  
ITEM EXPANSION  
Test Display LEDs  
Unit Type  
COMMENT  
ENTRY  
CONFIGURATION  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ON/OFF  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
UNIT  
X
X
X
X
OPT1  
Cooler Fluid  
OPT2  
Control Method  
Cooling Reset Type  
RSET  
Default: 0  
0 = None  
1 = Switch  
DMDC*  
X
Demand Limit Select  
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input  
3 = SCN Loadshed  
Default: 100%  
DM20  
SHNM  
SHDL  
SHTM  
DLS1  
DLS2  
XXX %  
XXX  
Demand Limit at 20 mA  
Range: 0 to 100  
Loadshed Group  
Number  
Default: 0  
Range: 0 to 99  
Loadshed Demand  
Delta  
Default: 0%  
Range: 0 to 60%  
XXX%  
XXX MIN  
XXX %  
XXX %  
Maximum Loadshed  
Time  
Default: 60 min.  
Range: 0 to 120 min.  
Demand Limit  
Switch 1  
Default: 80%  
Range: 0 to 100%  
Demand Limit  
Switch 2  
Default: 50%  
Range: 0 to 100%  
*Seven items skipped in this example.  
OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — De-  
termine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit break-  
er(s). Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is com-  
plete.  
COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when  
cooling load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to  
satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point.  
THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an  
open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace  
T1, T2, or T9 as required. Unit restarts automatically, but must  
be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the Scrolling  
Marquee as shown in Table 24.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart Possi-  
ble causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown be-  
low. (See Table 28 also.) Refer to Fig. 22-26 for Component  
Arrangement and Control Wiring Diagrams.  
GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored,  
restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up.  
UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS  
OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediate-  
ly. Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch  
control or in the REMOTE CONTACT position for control  
through remote contact closure.  
CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN —  
After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected,  
reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the Scrolling Mar-  
quee as shown in Table 24.  
OPEN HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH(ES) — Determine and  
correct the cause of the failure. The switch automatically resets,  
but the unit must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with  
the Scrolling Marquee as shown in Table 24.  
OPEN COMPRESSOR INTERNAL THERMAL PRO-  
TECTION — This switch provides compressor over tempera-  
ture protection. Determine and correct the cause of the prob-  
lem. The switch resets automatically, but the unit must be reset  
manually resetting the alarm with the Scrolling Marquee as  
shown in Table 24.  
If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of  
the safety devices listed, determine and correct cause  
before attempting another restart.  
LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can  
lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls  
have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep  
the chiller from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant  
charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this  
condition. To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing  
of the system, do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm  
conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 28 Troubleshooting  
SYMPTOMS  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
Cooler Circulating Pump Does  
Not Run  
Power line open  
Control fuse or circuit breaker open  
Reset circuit breaker.  
Check control circuit for ground or short. Reset  
breaker and replace fuse.  
Compressor over temperature sensor open (06D)  
Tripped power breaker  
Find cause of high temperature and reset controls.  
Check the controls. Find the cause of trip and reset  
breaker.  
Cooler circulating pump not running  
Power off restart.  
Pump binding free pump.  
Incorrect wiring rewire.  
Pump motor burned out replace.  
Check connections.  
Check wiring and rewire if necessary.  
Check line voltage determine location of  
voltage drop and remedy deficiency.  
Loose terminal connection  
Improperly wired controls  
Low line voltage  
Compressor motor defective  
Check motor winding for open or short.  
Replace compressor if necessary.  
Seized compressor  
Replace compressor.  
Compressor Cycles  
Off on Loss of Charge  
Loss of charge control erratic in action  
Repair leak and recharge.  
Replace control.  
Low refrigerant charge  
Low suction temperature  
Thermistor failure  
System load was reduced faster than controller  
could remove stages  
Add refrigerant.  
Raise cooler leaving fluid temperature set point.  
Replace thermistor.  
Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into  
the control band. Avoid rapidly removing system  
load.  
Compressor Cycles Off on Out  
of Range Condition  
Temperature controller deadband setting is too low  
High-pressure control acting erratically  
Compressor discharge valve partially closed  
Noncondensables in system  
Raise deadband setting.  
Replace control.  
Open valve or replace (if defective).  
Purge system.  
Compressor Shuts Down on  
High-Pressure Control  
Condenser scaled/dirty  
Clean condenser.  
Condenser water pump or fans not operating  
System overcharged with refrigerant  
Low refrigerant charge  
Start pump repair or replace if defective.  
Reduce charge.  
Add refrigerant.  
Unit Operates Too Long  
or Continuously  
Control contacts fused  
Replace control.  
Air in system  
Purge system.  
Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter Clean or replace as needed.  
drier  
Defective insulation  
Service load  
Inefficient compressor  
Piping vibration  
Replace or repair as needed.  
Keep doors and windows closed.  
Check valves, and replace if necessary.  
Support piping as required.  
Unusual or Loud System  
Noises  
Check for loose pipe connections  
Add refrigerant.  
Check for plugged liquid line filter drier.  
Replace compressor (worn bearings).  
Check for loose compressor holddown bolts.  
Repair leak.  
Expansion valve hissing  
Compressor noisy  
Leak in system  
Compressor Loses Oil  
Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls) Replace compressor.  
Oil trapped in line  
Check piping for oil traps.  
Repair leak and recharge.  
Open valve or remove restriction.  
Replace filter drier.  
Hot Liquid Line  
Frosted Liquid Line  
Shortage of refrigerant due to leak  
Shutoff valve partially closed or restricted  
Restricted filter drier  
Frosted Suction Line  
Freeze-Up  
Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: Adjust expansion valve. Replace valve if defective.  
this is a normal condition for brine applications)  
Improper charging  
Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through  
the cooler while charging, and suction pressure in  
cooler is equal to or greater than pressure corre-  
sponding to 32 F (0° C) (58 psig [400 kPa] for  
Refrigerant 22).  
System not drained for winter shutdown  
Loose Thermistor  
Recommended that system be filled with an appro-  
priate glycol mixture to prevent freezing of pumps  
and fluid tubing.  
Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEGEND  
C
Contactor, Compressor  
Circuit Breaker  
CB  
CHC  
CWP  
EMM  
FC  
Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor  
Chilled Water Pump  
Energy Management  
Fan Contactor  
FIOP  
FU  
Factory-Installed Option  
Fuse  
GND  
MBB  
MM  
Ground  
Main Base Board  
Motormaster®  
MMPT  
MS  
Motormaster Pressure Transducer  
Manual Starter  
NEC  
SW  
National Electrical Code  
Switch  
Terminal Block  
Transformer  
TB  
TRAN  
Factory Wiring  
Field Wiring  
Accessory or Option Wiring  
Fig. 22 Component Arrangement 30RA010-030  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEGEND  
C
Contactor, Compressor  
Circuit Breaker  
CB  
CHC  
CWP  
EMM  
FC  
Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor  
Chilled Water Pump  
Energy Management  
Fan Contactor  
FIOP  
FU  
Factory-Installed Option  
Fuse  
GND  
MBB  
MM  
Ground  
Main Base Board  
Motormaster®  
MMPT  
MS  
Motormaster Pressure Transducer  
Manual Starter  
NEC  
SW  
National Electrical Code  
Switch  
TB  
Terminal Block  
Transformer  
TRAN  
Factory Wiring  
Field Wiring  
Accessory or Option Wiring  
Fig. 23 Component Arrangement 30RA032-040  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEGEND  
C
Contactor, Compressor  
Circuit Breaker  
Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor  
Chilled Water Pump  
Energy Management  
Fan Contactor  
CB  
CHC  
CWP  
EMM  
FC  
FIOP  
FU  
Factory-Installed Option  
Fuse  
Ground  
Main Base Board  
Motormaster®  
GND  
MBB  
MM  
MMPT  
MS  
Motormaster Pressure Transducer  
Manual Starter  
NEC  
SW  
National Electrical Code  
Switch  
TB  
Terminal Block  
Transformer  
TRAN  
Factory Wiring  
Field Wiring  
Accessory or Option Wiring  
Fig. 24 Component Arrangement 30RA042-055  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. Press  
.
Alarms and Alerts These are warnings of abnormal  
or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the  
whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as  
described in Table 29.  
Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if  
the condition corrects itself. The following method must be  
used to reset manual alarms:  
Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the  
alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the  
LED on the side of the Scrolling Marquee Display. Press  
ENTER  
The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying  
PASS and WORD. Press to display the default pass-  
ENTER  
for each character. If the password  
word, 1111. Press  
ENTER  
has been changed, use the arrow keys to change each individu-  
al character. Toggle the display to “YES” and press  
The alarms will be reset.  
.
ENTER  
and  
until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET  
ENTER  
Table 29 Alarm and Alert Codes  
ALARM/ ALARM  
WHY WAS THIS  
ALARM  
GENERATED?  
ACTION TAKEN  
BY CONTROL  
RESET  
METHOD  
PROBABLE  
CAUSE  
ALERT  
CODE  
OR  
DESCRIPTION  
ALERT  
T051  
T052  
T055  
T056  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Circuit A, Compressor 1  
Failure  
Compressor feedback signal  
does not match relay state  
Compressor A1 shut  
down.  
Manual High-pressure switch open,  
faulty auxiliary contacts, loss  
of condenser air, liquid  
valve closed, filter drier  
plugged, non-condensables,  
operation beyond capability.  
Circuit A, Compressor 2  
Failure  
Compressor feedback signal  
does not match relay state  
Compressor A2 shut  
down.  
Manual High-pressure switch open,  
faulty auxiliary contacts, loss  
of condenser air, liquid  
valve closed, filter drier  
plugged, non-condensables,  
operation beyond capability.  
Circuit B, Compressor 1  
Failure  
Compressor feedback signal  
does not match relay state  
Compressor B1 shut  
down.  
Manual High-pressure switch open,  
faulty auxiliary contacts, loss  
of condenser air, liquid  
valve closed, filter drier  
plugged, non-condensables,  
operation beyond capability.  
Circuit B, Compressor 2  
Failure  
Compressor feedback signal  
does not match relay state  
Compressor B2 shut  
down.  
Manual High-pressure switch open,  
faulty auxiliary contacts, loss  
of condenser air, liquid  
valve closed, filter drier  
plugged, non-condensables,  
operation beyond capability.  
A060  
A061  
T068  
Alarm Cooler Leaving Fluid  
Thermistor Failure (T1)  
Thermistor outside range of  
Chiller shutdown  
immediately  
Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged  
cable/wire or wiring error.  
40 to 245 F (40 to 118 C)  
Alarm Cooler Entering Fluid  
Thermistor Failure (T2)  
Thermistor outside range of  
40 to 245 F (40 to 118 C)  
Chiller shutdown  
immediately  
Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged  
cable/wire or wiring error.  
None  
None  
Alert  
Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure If return gas sensors are  
enabled (RG.EN) and  
None  
None  
Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged  
cable/wire or wiring error.  
thermistor is outside range of  
40 to 245 F (40 to 118 C)  
T069  
T073  
Circuit B Return Gas Thermistor Failure If return gas sensors are  
enabled (RG.EN) and  
Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged  
cable/wire or wiring error.  
thermistor is outside range of  
40 to 245 F 40 to 118 C)  
Outside Air Thermistor  
Failure (T9)  
Thermistor outside range of  
40 to 245 F (40 to 118 C)  
Temperature reset  
Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged  
cable/wire or wiring error.  
disabled. Chiller runs  
under normal control/set  
points. When capacity  
reaches 0, cooler/pump  
heaters are energized.  
T074  
T077  
T078  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Space Temperature  
Thermistor outside range of  
Temperature reset  
disabled. Chiller runs  
under normal control/set  
points.  
Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged  
cable/wire or wiring error.  
Thermistor Failure (T10)  
40 to 245 F (40 to 118 C)  
Circuit A Saturated  
Suction Temperature  
exceeds Cooler Leaving  
Fluid Temperature  
Faulty expansion valve,  
suction pressure transducer  
or leaving fluid thermistor  
(T1).  
Circuit A shutdown after  
pumpdown complete.  
Automatic Faulty expansion valve or  
suction pressure transducer  
(T5) or leaving fluid  
thermistor (T1).  
Circuit B Saturated  
Suction Temperature  
exceeds Cooler Leaving  
Fluid Temperature  
Faulty expansion valve,  
suction pressure transducer  
or leaving fluid thermistor  
(T1).  
Circuit B shutdown after  
pumpdown complete  
Automatic Faulty expansion valve or  
suction pressure transducer  
(T6) or leaving fluid  
thermistor (T1).  
T079  
T090  
T091  
T092  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Lead/Lag LWT  
Thermistor outside range of  
Chiller runs as a stand  
alone machine  
Automatic Dual LWT thermistor failure,  
damaged cable/wire or  
wiring error.  
Thermistor Failure  
40 to 245 F (40 to 118 C)  
Circuit A Discharge  
Pressure Transducer Failure  
Voltage ratio more than  
99.9% or less than .5%.  
Circuit A shut down  
Circuit B shut down  
Circuit A shut down  
Automatic Transducer failure, poor  
connection to MBB, or wiring  
damage/error.  
Circuit B Discharge  
Pressure Transducer Failure  
Voltage ratio more than  
99.9% or less than .5%.  
Automatic Transducer failure, poor  
connection to MBB, or wiring  
damage/error.  
Circuit A Suction  
Pressure Transducer Failure  
Voltage ratio more than  
99.9% or less than .5%.  
Automatic Transducer failure, poor  
connection to MBB, or wiring  
damage/error.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 29 Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)  
ALARM/  
ALERT  
CODE  
ALARM  
OR  
ALERT  
WHY WAS THIS  
ACTION TAKEN  
ALARM  
RESET  
METHOD  
PROBABLE  
CAUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
BY CONTROL  
GENERATED?  
T093  
Alert  
Circuit B Suction  
Voltage ratio more than  
99.9% or less than .5%.  
Circuit B shut down  
Automatic  
Manual  
Transducer failure, poor  
connection to MBB, or wiring  
damage/error.  
Pressure Transducer  
Failure  
T110  
Alert  
Circuit A Loss of Charge  
If the compressors are off  
and discharge pressure  
reading is < 10 psig for  
30 sec.  
Circuit not allowed to  
start.  
Refrigerant leak or  
transducer failure  
T111  
T112  
T113  
T114  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Circuit B Loss of Charge  
If the compressors are off  
and discharge pressure  
reading is < 10 psig for  
30 sec.  
Circuit not allowed to  
start.  
Manual  
Manual  
Manual  
Refrigerant leak or  
transducer failure  
Circuit A High Saturated  
Suction Temperature  
Circuit saturated suction  
temperature pressure  
transducer > 60 F (15.6 C)  
for 5 minutes  
Circuit shut down  
Circuit shut down  
Faulty Expansion valve,  
faulty suction pressure  
transducer or high entering  
fluid temperature.  
Circuit B High Saturated  
Suction Temperature  
Circuit saturated suction  
temperature pressure  
transducer > 60 F (15.6 C)  
for 5 minutes  
Faulty Expansion valve,  
faulty suction pressure  
transducer or high entering  
fluid temperature.  
Circuit A Low Suction  
Superheat  
Return gas sensor enabled  
and suction superheat is  
more than 10° F (5.6 C)  
below the suction superheat  
set point for 5 minutes.  
Circuit A shut down after Automatic restart  
pumpdown complete.  
Faulty expansion valve,  
faulty suction pressure  
transducer, faulty suction gas  
thermistor, circuit  
after first daily  
occurrence.  
Manual restart  
thereafter.  
overcharged  
T115  
T116  
T117  
T126  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Circuit B Low Suction  
Superheat  
Return gas sensor enabled  
and suction superheat is  
more than 10° F (5.6 C)  
below the suction superheat  
set point for 5 minutes.  
Circuit B shut down after Automatic restart  
Faulty expansion valve,  
faulty suction pressure  
transducer, faulty suction  
gas thermistor, circuit  
overcharged  
pumpdown complete.  
after first daily  
occurrence.  
Manual restart  
thereafter.  
Circuit A Low Cooler  
Suction Temperature  
Mode 7 caused the com-  
pressor to unload 6 consecu-  
tive times with less than a  
30-minute interval between  
each circuit shutdown.  
Circuit shut down  
Manual  
Manual  
Faulty expansion valve, low  
refrigerant charge, plugged  
filter drier, faulty suction  
pressure transducer, low  
cooler fluid flow  
Circuit B Low Cooler  
Suction Temperature  
Mode 8 caused the com-  
pressor to unload 6 consecu-  
tive times with less than a  
30-minute interval between  
each circuit shutdown.  
Circuit shut down  
Faulty expansion valve, low  
refrigerant charge, plugged  
filter drier, faulty suction  
pressure transducer, low  
cooler fluid flow  
Circuit A High  
Discharge Pressure  
SCT >Maximum condensing Circuit shut down  
temperature from operating  
envelope  
Automatic, only  
after first 3 daily  
occurrences.  
Faulty transducer/high  
pressure switch, low/  
restricted condenser  
airflow  
Manual reset  
thereafter. Read-  
ing from OAT sen-  
sor (T9) must drop  
5 F (2.8 C) before  
restart  
T127  
Alert  
Circuit B High  
Discharge Pressure  
SCT >Maximum condensing Circuit shut down  
temperature from operating  
envelope  
Automatic, only  
after first 3 daily  
Faulty transducer/high  
pressure switch, low/  
occurrences. Man- restricted condenser  
ual reset thereafter. airflow  
Reading from OAT  
sensor (T9) must  
drop 5 F (2.8 C)  
before restart  
T133  
T134  
Alert  
Alert  
Circuit A Low Suction  
Pressure  
Suction pressure below  
15 psig for 8 seconds or  
below 8 psig  
Circuit shut down  
Circuit shut down  
Automatic  
Faulty or plugged TXV, low  
refrigerant charge, TXV out  
of adjustment, liquid  
restart after first  
daily occurrence.  
Manual restart  
thereafter.  
line valve partially closed  
Circuit B Low Suction  
Pressure  
Suction pressure below  
15 psig for 8 seconds or  
below 8 psig  
Automatic  
Faulty or plugged TXV, low  
refrigerant charge, TXV out  
of adjustment, liquid  
restart after first  
daily occurrence.  
Manual restart  
thereafter.  
line valve partially closed  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 29 Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)  
ALARM/  
ALERT  
CODE  
ALARM  
OR  
ALERT  
WHY WAS THIS  
ACTION TAKEN  
ALARM  
RESET  
METHOD  
PROBABLE  
CAUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
BY CONTROL  
GENERATED?  
A140  
Alert  
Reverse Rotation  
Detected  
Incoming chiller power  
leads not phased correctly  
Chiller not allowed to  
start.  
Manual  
Reverse any two  
incoming power  
leads to correct.  
Check for correct fan  
rotation first.  
A150  
Alarm  
Emergency Stop  
SCN emergency stop  
command received  
Chiller shutdown  
without going through  
pumpdown.  
Automatic once SCN  
command for  
EMSTOP returns to  
normal  
SCN Network  
command.  
A151  
A152  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Illegal Configuration  
One or more illegal  
configurations exists.  
Chiller is not allowed to  
start.  
Manual once  
Configuration error.  
Check unit settings.  
configuration errors  
are corrected  
Unit Down Due to  
Failure  
Both circuits are down due  
to alarms/alerts.  
Chiller is unable  
to run.  
Automatic once  
alarms/alerts are  
cleared that prevent  
the chiller from  
starting.  
Alarm notifies user  
that chiller is 100%  
down.  
T153  
Alert  
Real Time Clock  
Hardware Failure  
Internal clock on MBB fails  
Hardware failure with MBB  
Occupancy schedule  
will not be used. Chiller  
defaults to Local On  
mode.  
Automatic when  
correct clock control  
restarts.  
Time/Date/Month/  
Day/Year not  
properly set.  
A154  
T155  
Alarm  
Alert  
Serial EEPROM  
Hardware Failure  
Chiller is unable  
to run.  
Manual  
Manual  
Main Base Board  
failure.  
Serial EEPROM  
Storage Failure  
Configuration/storage  
failure with MBB  
No Action  
Potential failure of  
MBB. Download  
current operating  
software. Replace  
MBB if error occurs  
again.  
A156  
A157  
A189  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Critical Serial EEPROM  
Storage Failure  
Configuration/storage  
failure with MBB  
Chiller is not allowed  
to run.  
Manual  
Manual  
Manual  
Main Base Board  
failure.  
A/D Hardware Failure  
Hardware failure with  
peripheral device  
Chiller is not allowed  
to run.  
Main Base Board  
failure.  
Cooler pump auxiliary  
contact inputs miswired  
Pump 1 (2) aux contacts  
closed when pump 2 (1)  
energized.  
Both pump outputs  
are turned off.  
Wiring error, faulty  
pump contactor  
auxiliary contacts.  
T173  
Alert  
Loss of Communication  
with EMM  
MBB loses communication  
with EMM  
4 to 20 mA  
Automatic  
Wiring error, faulty  
wiring or failed  
Energy Manage-  
ment Module (EMM).  
temperature reset  
disabled. Demand  
Limit set to 100%. 4 to  
20 mA set point  
disabled.  
T174  
T176  
Alert  
Alert  
4 to 20 mA Cooling Set  
Point Input Failure  
If configured with EMM and  
input less than 2 mA or  
greater than 22 mA  
Set point function  
disabled. Chiller  
controls to CSP1.  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Faulty signal  
generator, wiring  
error, or faulty EMM.  
4 to 20 mA  
Temperature Reset  
Input Failure  
If configured with EMM  
and input less than 2 mA or  
greater than 22 mA  
Reset function  
Faulty signal  
generator, wiring  
error, or faulty EMM.  
disabled. Chiller  
returns to normal set  
point control.  
T177  
Alert  
4 to 20 mA Demand  
Limit Input Failure  
If configured with EMM and  
input less than 2 mA or  
greater than 22 mA  
Demand limit function  
disabled. Chiller  
returns to 100%  
demand limit  
Automatic  
Faulty signal  
generator, wiring  
error, or faulty EMM.  
control.  
T189  
T190  
T191  
T192  
T193  
T194  
Alarm  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Cooler pump 2 and  
Aux Contact Input  
miswired  
Alarm is generated when  
the pumps aux contacts  
close when a pump is  
called for  
Chiller not allowed to  
start  
Manual  
Manual  
Manual  
Manual  
Manual  
Manual  
Wiring error  
Cooler pump 1 Aux  
Contacts Failed to Close  
at Start-Up  
Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts  
did not close within  
26 seconds after pump  
was started  
Pump 1 turned off.  
Pump 2 will be started  
if available.  
Wiring error, faulty  
contacts on pump  
contactor  
Cooler pump 2 Aux  
Contacts Failed to Close  
at Start-Up  
Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts  
did not close within  
26 seconds after pump  
was started  
Pump 2 turned off.  
Pump 1 will be started  
if available.  
Wiring error, faulty  
contacts on pump  
contactor  
Cooler pump 1 Failed  
to Provide Flow at  
Start-Up  
Pump 1 did not provide  
flow to close flow switch  
within 60 seconds  
Pump 1 turned off.  
Pump 2 will be started  
if available.  
Wiring error, pump  
circuit breaker  
tripped, contactor  
failure  
Cooler pump 2 Failed  
to Provide Flow at  
Start-Up  
Pump 2 did not provide  
flow to close flow switch  
within 60 seconds  
Pump 1 turned off.  
Pump 2 will be started  
if available.  
Wiring error, pump  
circuit breaker  
tripped, contactor  
failure  
Cooler pump 1 Aux  
Contacts Opened  
During Normal  
Operation  
Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts  
open for 26 seconds after  
initially made. All  
compressors shut down.  
Pump 1 turned off.  
Pump 2 will be started  
if available. Chiller  
allowed to run if  
Pump 2 successfully  
starts.  
Wiring error, faulty  
contacts on pump  
contactor  
T195  
Alert  
Cooler pump 2 Aux  
Contacts Opened  
During Normal  
Operation  
Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts  
open for 26 seconds after  
initially made. All  
compressors shut down.  
Pump 2 turned off.  
Pump 1 will be started  
if available. Chiller  
allowed to run if  
Pump 1 successfully  
starts.  
Manual  
Wiring error, faulty  
contacts on pump  
contactor  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 29 Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)  
ALARM/  
ALERT  
CODE  
ALARM  
OR  
ALERT  
WHY WAS THIS  
ACTION TAKEN  
ALARM  
RESET  
METHOD  
PROBABLE  
CAUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
BY CONTROL  
GENERATED?  
T196  
Alert  
Flow Lost While Pump 1  
Running  
Cooler flow switch contacts  
open for 3 seconds after  
initially made  
All compressors  
Manual  
Wiring error, pump  
circuit breaker  
tripped, contactor fail-  
ure  
shut down. Pump 1  
turned off. Pump 2 will  
be started if available.  
Chiller allowed to run if  
Pump 2 successfully  
starts and flow switch  
is closed.  
T197  
Alert  
Flow Lost While Pump 2  
Running  
Cooler flow switch contacts  
open for 3 seconds after  
initially made  
All compressors shut  
down. Pump 2 turned  
off. Pump 1 will be  
started if available.  
Chiller allowed to run if  
Pump 1 successfully  
starts and flow switch  
is closed.  
Manual  
Wiring error, pump  
circuit breaker  
tripped, contactor  
failure  
T198  
T199  
T200  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Cooler pump 1 Aux  
Contacts Closed While  
Pump Off  
Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts  
closed for 26 seconds  
when pump state is off  
Chiller not allowed to  
start  
Automatic when  
Wiring error, faulty  
pump contactor  
aux contacts open  
(welded contacts)  
Cooler pump 2 Aux  
Contacts Closed While  
Pump Off  
Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts  
closed for 26 seconds  
when pump state is off  
Chiller not allowed to  
start  
Automatic when  
aux contacts open  
Wiring error, faulty  
pump contactor  
(welded contacts)  
Cooler Flow/Interlock  
Contacts failed to Close  
at start-up  
Cooler flow switch contacts  
failed to close within  
Chiller not allowed to  
start. For models with  
dual pumps, the  
second pump will be  
started if available  
Manual  
Manual  
Wiring error, pump  
circuit breaker  
tripped, contactor  
failure, faulty flow  
switch or interlock  
1 minute (if cooler pump  
control is enabled) or  
within 5 minutes (if cooler  
pump control is not  
enabled) after start-up  
A201  
A202  
T203  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alert  
Cooler Flow/Interlock  
Contacts Opened  
During Normal  
Operation  
Flow switch opens for at  
least 3 seconds after  
being initially closed  
All compressors shut  
down. For models with  
dual pumps, the  
second pump will be  
started if available  
Cooler pump failure,  
faulty flow switch or  
interlock, pump  
circuit breaker  
tripped  
Cooler Pump Interlock  
Closed When Pump is  
Off  
If configured for cooler  
pump control and flow  
switch input is closed for  
5 minutes while pump  
output(s) are off  
Chiller shut down  
Automatic when  
aux contacts open  
Wiring error, faulty  
pump contactor  
(welded contacts)  
Loss of Communication  
with slave chiller  
Master chiller MBB  
loses communication  
with slave chiller MBB  
Dual chiller control  
disabled. Chiller runs  
as a stand-alone  
machine.  
Automatic  
Wiring error, faulty  
wiring, failed Slave  
chiller MBB module,  
power loss at slave  
chiller, wrong slave  
address.  
T204  
T205  
Alert  
Alert  
Loss of Communication  
with master chiller  
Slave chiller MBB loses  
communication with  
master chiller MBB  
Dual chiller control  
disabled. Chiller runs  
as a stand-alone  
machine  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Wiring error, faulty  
wiring, failed master  
chiller MBB module,  
power loss at Master  
chiller.  
Master and slave chiller  
with same address  
Master and slave chiller  
have the same SCN  
address (SCN.A)  
Dual chiller routine  
disabled. Master/slave  
run as stand-alone  
chillers.  
SCN Address for  
both chillers is the  
same. Must be  
different. Check  
SCN.A under the  
OPT2 sub-mode in  
Configuration at both  
chillers.  
T206  
A207  
Alert  
High Leaving Chilled  
Water Temperature  
LWT read is greater than  
LCW Alert Limit, Total  
capacity is 100% and LWT  
is greater than LWT  
Alert only. No action  
taken.  
Automatic  
Building load greater  
than unit capacity,  
low water/brine flow  
or compressor fault.  
Check for other  
reading one minute ago  
alarms/alerts.  
Alarm  
Cooler Freeze  
Protection  
Cooler EWT or LWT is less  
than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ)  
Chiller shutdown  
without going through  
pumpdown. Cooler  
pump continues to  
run a minimum of  
5 minutes (if control  
enabled).  
Both EWT and LWT  
must be at least 6 F  
(3.3 C) above Brine  
Freeze point (BR.FZ).  
Automatic for first,  
Manual reset thereaf-  
ter.  
Faulty thermistor  
(T1/T2), low water  
flow.  
A208  
T300  
Alarm  
Alert  
EWT or LWT  
Cooler EWT is less than  
LWT by 3° F (1.7° C) for  
1 minute after a circuit is  
started  
Chiller shutdown.  
Manual  
Faulty cooler pump,  
low water flow,  
Thermistor failure  
Cooler pump shut off  
(if control enabled).  
plugged fluid strainer.  
Cooler Pump 1  
Scheduled  
Maintenance Due  
Pump 1 Service  
None  
Automatic  
Routine pump  
maintenance  
required  
Countdown (P.1.DN)  
expired. Complete pump 1  
maintenance and enter  
'YES' for Pump 1  
Maintenance Done  
(P.1.MN) item.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 29 Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)  
ALARM/  
ALERT  
CODE  
ALARM  
OR  
ALERT  
WHY WAS THIS  
ACTION TAKEN  
ALARM  
RESET  
METHOD  
PROBABLE  
CAUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
BY CONTROL  
GENERATED?  
T301  
Alert  
Cooler Pump 2  
Pump 2 Service  
None  
Automatic  
Routine pump  
maintenance  
required  
Scheduled  
Countdown (P.2.DN)  
expired. Complete pump 2  
maintenance and  
Maintenance Due  
enter 'YES' for Pump 1  
Maintenance Done  
(P.2.MN) item.  
T302  
T303  
Alert  
Alert  
Strainer Blowdown  
Scheduled  
Strainer Service  
None  
None  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Routine strainer  
maintenance  
required  
Countdown (S.T.DN)  
expired. Complete strainer  
blowdown and enter 'YES' for  
Strainer Maintenance Done  
(S.T.MN) item.  
Maintenance Due  
Condenser Coil  
Maintenance Due  
Coil Service Countdown  
(C.L.DN) expired.  
Complete condenser coil  
cleaning and enter 'YES'  
for Coil Maintenance Done  
(C.L.MN) item.  
Routine condenser  
coil maintenance  
required  
T950  
T951  
T952  
Alert  
Alert  
Alert  
Loss of Communication  
with Water System  
Manager  
No communications have  
been received by the MBB  
within 5 minutes of last  
transmission  
WSM forces removed.  
Chiller runs under own  
control  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Failed module, wiring  
error, failed  
transformer, loose  
connection plug,  
wrong address  
Loss of Communication  
with FlotronicSystem  
Manager  
No communications have  
been received by the MBB  
within 5 minutes of last  
transmission  
FSM forces removed.  
Chiller runs under own  
control  
Failed module, wiring  
error, failed  
transformer, loose  
connection plug,  
wrong address  
Loss of Communication  
with Hydronic System  
Manager  
No communications have  
been received by the MBB  
within 5 minutes of last  
transmission  
HSM forces removed.  
Chiller runs under own  
control  
Failed module, wiring  
error, failed  
transformer, loose  
connection plug,  
wrong address  
LEGEND  
SCN  
Sterlco Comfort Network  
Energy Management Module  
Entering Fluid Temperature  
FlotronicSystem Manager  
Hydronic System Manager  
Leaving Chilled Water  
EMM  
EWT  
FSM  
HSM  
LCW  
LWT  
MBB  
OAT  
Leaving Fluid Temperature  
Main Base Board  
Outdoor-Air Temperature  
Saturated Condensing Temperature  
Thermostatic Expansion Valve  
Water System Manager  
SCT  
TXV  
WSM  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 30 Unit Torque Specification  
SERVICE  
FASTENER  
Compressor Mounting  
Bolts  
Compressor Power  
Connections  
Compressor Ground  
Terminal Connections  
RECOMMENDED TORQUE  
10 to 14 ft-lb (13.5 to 18.9 N-m)  
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD.  
Turn off all power to unit before servicing. The  
ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch  
on control panel does not shut off control  
power; use field disconnect.  
24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7- to 3.2 N-m)  
14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)  
10 to 13 ft-lb (13.5 to 17.6 N-m)  
Oil Equalization  
Line Fitting  
Electronic Components  
CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced elec-  
tronic control system that normally does not require service.  
For details on controls refer to Operating Data section.  
Access to the compressors is through latched panels from  
beneath the control box on all models or from opposite the coil  
side (sizes 010-030 only). The front door(s) provide access to  
the compressor(s) and all components of the refrigeration sys-  
tem. For size 010-030 units, access to the controls is through  
the upper latched outer door above the compressor access door.  
Similarly, the upper center latched door on sizes 032-055 gives  
access to the controls. Inner panels are secured in place and  
should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off.  
Cooler  
BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER RE-  
PLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be  
repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak (refrigerant or water)  
develops, the heat exchanger must be replaced. To replace a  
brazed plate heat exchanger:  
1. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the  
heat exchanger.  
2. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as  
the original heat exchanger. The unit insulation covers the  
manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths of the  
replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the  
same.  
3. Reclaim the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the  
refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.  
4. Remove the old heat exchanger and the bracket that it is  
mounted to. The replacement heat exchanger is supplied  
attached to a new mounting bracket and is fully insulated.  
It also includes a cooler heater. Use of the heater is not re-  
quired unless the original cooler contained a factory in-  
stalled heater.  
5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and at-  
tach the mounting bracket hardware to the fan uprights  
(sizes 010-030) or to the bottom bracket (sizes 032-055)  
using the hardware removed in Step 4. Reconnect the  
cooler heater if required.  
Compressor Replacement (Refer to Fig. 27-  
30) All models contain scroll compressors and have from  
one to four compressors. The size 010-030 units are a single re-  
frigeration circuit while sizes 032-055 are dual circuit. A com-  
pressor is most easily removed from the front of the unit, de-  
pending on where clearance space was allowed during unit  
installation.  
Unscrew the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the  
compressor power and ground connections. Remove the cable  
from the compressor junction box. Remove the connections  
from the internal thermostat and high-pressure switch (all com-  
pressors except SM110) or high-pressure switch connections  
(SM110 only). Knock the same holes out of the new compres-  
sor junction box and install the cable connectors from the old  
compressor. Remove the blockoff channel from below the con-  
trol box.  
6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on  
the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver  
as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver.  
Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under nor-  
mal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the cop-  
per solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from chang-  
ing its structure. Failure to do so can result in internal  
or external leakage at the connections which cannot be re-  
paired.  
Be sure the oil equalization line fitting is removed from the  
old compressor and installed on the new compressor for those  
models with dual compressor circuits. The compressors are  
bolted to the unit basepan. Remove the 4 bolts holding the  
compressor to the basepan. Save the mounting hardware for  
use with the new compressor. Carefully cut the compressor  
suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close to the  
compressor as feasible. For dual compressor circuits, do NOT  
disturb the suction line tee at the backside of the compressors.  
This tee contains a special tube that is required for proper oil  
return. Remove high-pressure switch and pressure transduc-  
er(s) if required for compressor removal. Lift one corner of the  
compressor at a time and remove all the rubber mounting  
grommets. Remove the old compressor from the unit.  
Slide the new compressor in place on the basepan. Lifting  
one side of the compressor at a time, replace all of the compres-  
sor mounting grommets. Using new tubing or couplings as re-  
quired, reconnect compressor suction and discharge lines. Us-  
ing hardware saved, reinstall the mounting bolts and washers  
through the compressor feet. Using proper techniques, braze  
suction and discharge lines and check for leaks. Reconnect oil  
equalization line on dual compressor circuit models.  
7. Reconnect the water/brine lines.  
8. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.  
BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER  
CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be  
cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service skilled in  
chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5% phos-  
phoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5%  
oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the  
exchanger, preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning,  
rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the  
acid. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly.  
The factory-installed strainer screen in front of the water/  
brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodi-  
cally, depending on condition of the chiller water/brine.  
Reconnect the compressor power connections and high-  
pressure switch/internal thermostat wiring as on the old com-  
pressor. Refer to Fig. 27-30. Following the installation of the  
new compressor, tighten all hardware to the following specifi-  
cations. (See Table 30.)  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMPRESSOR  
BASE  
Fig. 27 Typical Compressor Mounting All Sizes  
LEGEND  
HPS High-Pressure Switch  
Fig. 28 Compressor Wiring  
COMP B2  
COMP B1  
COMP A2  
COMP A1  
COMP A1  
COMP A2  
Fig. 30 Compressor Location 30RA032-055  
Fig. 29 Compressor Location 30RA010-030  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges bent over) if the tool  
is applied across the fins.  
Check Oil Charge Compressors are factory charged  
with oil as shown in Table 31.  
NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a  
surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil.  
This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded  
fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity  
clean water rinse.  
Periodic Clean Water Rinse — A periodic clean water rinse is  
very beneficial for coils that are applied in coastal or industrial  
environments. However, it is very important that the water  
rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to avoid  
damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning as described below  
is recommended.  
Routine Cleaning of Coil Surfaces — Monthly cleaning with  
Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner is essential to extend the  
life of coils. It is recommended that all coils, including stan-  
dard aluminum, pre-coated, copper/copper or E-coated coils  
are cleaned with the Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner as  
described below. Coil cleaning should be part of the units regu-  
larly scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of  
the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced dura-  
bility in the environment.  
Table 31 Oil Charge  
AMOUNT  
COMPRESSOR  
pints (liters)  
SM110  
SM115, SM125  
SM160  
5.7 (2.7)  
6.7 (3.2)  
7.0 (3.3)  
11.6 (5.5)  
SM185  
If oil is visible in the compressor sight glass, check unit for  
operating readiness as described in Pre-Start-Up, System  
Check section (page 74), then start the unit. Observe oil level  
and add oil if required, to bring oil level in compressor  
crankcase up to between 1/4 and 3/4 of sight glass during steady  
operation.  
To Add Oil:  
1. Check the oil level with all compressors in the circuit run-  
ning in a stabilized condition or immediately after com-  
pressor shutdown. The oil level should be at 1/3 of the oil  
sight glass immediately after shutdown.  
Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner is non-flammable,  
hypo allergenic, non-bacterial, USDA accepted biodegradable  
and 100% ecologically safe agent that will not harm the coil or  
surrounding components such as electrical wiring, painted  
metal surfaces or insulation. Use of non-recommended coil  
cleaners is strongly discouraged since coil and unit durability  
could be affected.  
2. Using a suitable pump, add oil while compressor(s) are  
running through the low side ¼ in. Schraeder fitting on  
the compressor. For SM110 models, this fitting is directly  
above the suction line connection. For all other compres-  
sor models, this fitting is near the oil equalization line fit-  
ting at the same height as the suction line connection.  
3. Run all compressors on the circuit for at least 15 minutes  
and check the oil level.  
Use only Sterling-approved compressor oil:  
Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PP680002  
Penreco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sontex 160 LT-A  
Do not reuse drained oil, and do not use any oil that has  
been exposed to the atmosphere.  
Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application  
Equipment  
21/2 Gallon Garden Sprayer  
Water Rinse with Low Velocity Spray Nozzle  
Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application  
Instructions  
Although Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner is harm-  
less to humans, animals, and marine life, proper eye pro-  
tection such as safety glasses is recommended during  
mixing and application.  
Condenser Section and Coils  
COIL CLEANING — For standard aluminum, copper and  
pre-coated aluminum fin coils, clean the coils with a vacuum  
cleaner, fresh water, compressed air, or a bristle brush (not  
wire). Units installed in corrosive environments should have  
coil cleaning as part of a planned maintenance schedule. In this  
type of application, all accumulations of dirt should be cleaned  
off the coil. When condenser cleaning is complete, enter “Yes”  
for coil cleaning maintenance done (CL.MN) value under Run  
Status.  
Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum  
cleaner as described above.  
Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a  
low velocity garden hose being careful not to bend fins.  
Mix Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner in a 21/2 gallon  
garden sprayer according to the instructions included  
with the Enzyme Cleaner. The optimum solution tem-  
perature is 100 F.  
NOTE: DO NOT USE water in excess of 130 F as the enzy-  
matic activity will be destroyed.  
Thoroughly apply Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner  
solution to all coil surfaces including finned area, tube  
sheets and coil headers.  
Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and  
apply cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion.  
Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize poten-  
tial for fin damage.  
Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned  
areas.  
Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly  
cleaned.  
Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solu-  
tion for 10 minutes.  
Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing.  
Reapply cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute satura-  
tion is achieved.  
Do not use high-pressure water or air to clean coils — fin  
damage may result.  
CLEANING E-COATED COILS — Follow the outlined pro-  
cedure below for proper care, cleaning and maintenance of  
E-coated aluminum or copper fin coils:  
Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations — Rou-  
tine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper  
operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and  
removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the  
coil and extend the life of the unit.  
Remove Surface Loaded Fibers — Surface loaded fibers or  
dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum  
cleaner is not available, a soft brush may be used. In either  
case, the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins. Coil  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean  
water using downward rinsing motion of water spray  
nozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.  
CONTROL  
ACCESS  
Harsh Chemical and Acid Cleaners — Harsh chemical,  
household bleach or acid cleaners should not be used to  
clean outdoor or indoors coils of any kind. These cleaners  
can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can acceler-  
ate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissimilar  
materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of  
the coil, use the Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner as  
described above.  
High Velocity Water or Compressed Air — High veloc-  
ity water from a pressure washer, garden hose or com-  
pressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force  
of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase  
airside pressure drop. Reduced unit performance or nui-  
sance unit shutdown may occur.  
PUMP  
ACCESS  
SERVICE  
DOOR  
Fig. 31 30RA Access Panels  
CONDENSER SECTION — Condenser fan motors and fans  
can be serviced by removal of outlet grilles or side panels. See  
Fig. 31. Be sure the wire fan guard is in place over each fan be-  
fore starting unit. See Fig. 32 and 33 for proper fan adjustment.  
Fan mounting system is designed for fan to drop all the way on  
the motor shaft to be correctly located in the orifice. Tighten  
fan hub securely on motor shaft with setscrews which bear  
against the key. Be sure to replace the plastic fan cap and se-  
cure in place with the four locking clips to keep water and de-  
bris out of shaft area.  
FAN BLADE BOTTOMS  
OUT ON MOTOR SHAFT  
Check Refrigerant Feed Components  
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) — The TXV  
controls the flow of liquid refrigerant to the cooler by main-  
taining constant superheat of vapor leaving the cooler. There is  
one valve per refrigerant circuit. The valve(s) is activated by a  
temperature-sensing bulb(s) strapped to the suction line(s). For  
proper TXV sensing bulb location, see Fig. 34.  
The valve is factory-set to maintain between 8 and 12 F  
(4.4 and 6.7 C) of superheat entering the compressor(s). Ele-  
vate head pressure to 280 psig (1930 kPa) by blocking the air-  
flow through the condenser. Check the superheat during opera-  
tion after conditions have stabilized. A factory-installed tem-  
perature well is in each suction line for this purpose. If  
necessary, adjust the superheat to prevent refrigerant floodback  
to the compressor. Adjust TXVs 1/2 turn at a time, allowing the  
circuit to stabilize between adjustments. Turn stem counter-  
clockwise to decrease superheat and clockwise to increase su-  
perheat.  
Fig. 32 Condenser-Fan Mounting  
PLASTIC FAN  
PROPELLER  
CLEARANCE OF 0.25 INCHES  
(6.4 MM) FOR STANDARD  
CONDENSER FANS  
FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to main-  
tain a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described  
below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter  
drier is a sealed-type drier. When the drier needs to be  
changed, the entire filter drier must be replaced.  
NOTE: Dual circuit (032-055 sizes) units have 1 filter drier per  
circuit.  
FAN DECK  
SURFACE  
FAN ORIFICE  
Fig. 33 Condenser-Fan Position (Standard Fan)  
MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located  
immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the  
refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for  
refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit  
loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in the  
sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system  
or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the system,  
measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of the  
indicator as follows:  
The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the  
moisture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in  
contact with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in  
the system, change the corresponding filter drier.  
NOTE: Dual circuit (032-055 sizes) units have one indicator  
per circuit.  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the  
factory-installed capacity reduction option, a solenoid valve  
(minimum load valve) is located between the discharge line  
and the cooler entering-refrigerant line. The MBB cycles the  
solenoid to perform minimum load valve function.  
Green (safe) —Moisture is below 45 ppm  
Yellow-Green (caution) — 45 to 130 ppm  
Yellow (wet) — above 130 ppm  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TXV SENSOR  
LOCATION  
TXV SENSOR  
LOCATION  
Fig. 34 Mounting Locations for TXV Sensing Bulb  
The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the mini-  
mum load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with  
the minimum load valve is shown in Table 7.  
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pres-  
sure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which re-  
lieves at 210 F (100 C).  
The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge side  
of each compressor. A snubber is provided between the com-  
pressor discharge manifold and the high-pressure switch to pre-  
vent pressure pulsations from damaging the switch.  
The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of  
each compressor. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should  
exist, the switch opens and shuts off the affected compressor.  
The compressor feedback signal to J9 of the MBB then opens  
causing an alert condition. The MBB prevents the compressor  
from restarting until the alert condition is reset. The switch  
should open at the pressure corresponding to the appropriate  
switch setting as shown in Table 32.  
Compressor and Unit Protective Devices  
MANUAL STARTER — There is one manual starter per  
compressor in each unit. It protects the compressor(s) against  
overloading, locked rotor conditions, and primary single phas-  
ing. If the manual starter trips, determine the cause and correct  
it before resetting.  
Manual starters are factory set; field adjustment should not  
be required. Manual starters are also factory installed for each  
condenser fan motor and factory-installed chilled water pump.  
NOTE: Two-speed condenser fan motors on sizes 010-018 and  
032-040 have manual starters so that the motor is protected  
while running in both low and high speed modes. Refer to  
Appendix B for factory settings.  
COMPRESSOR INTERNAL THERMAL PROTECTION —  
All models include internal compressor protection. Models  
using the SM110 compressor (015 50 Hz and 018 60 Hz) have  
internal line break overloads. All other compressor models  
have internal discharge temperature thermostats that are wired  
in series with the compressor high pressure switch in the com-  
pressor motor junction box. The thermostat opens and shuts off  
the compressor if the discharge gas temperature exceeds 275 F  
(135 C). The thermostat will automatically reset when the tem-  
perature drops below a preset level, however, the control mod-  
ule will keep the unit locked off until the alert condition is  
reset.  
Table 32 Factory Settings, High-Pressure  
Switch (Fixed)  
CUTOUT  
Psig kPa  
426 2937 48 324 20 2206 138  
CUT-IN  
UNIT  
30RA  
Psig  
kPa  
7
Clear the alarm using the Scrolling Marquee display as de-  
scribed on page 42. The unit should restart after the compressor  
anti-short-cycle delay, built into the unit control module,  
expires.  
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is  
equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer. The  
transducers are NOT the same part number. The discharge  
pressure transducer is the universal pressure transducer while  
the suction pressure transducer is a discrete low pressure trans-  
ducer. These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor  
the status of the unit, but to also maintain operation of the chill-  
er within the compressor manufacturer's specified limits. The  
input to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also  
used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure  
conditions. In some cases, the unit may not be able to run at full  
capacity. The control module will automatically reduce the ca-  
pacity of a circuit as needed to maintain specified maximum/  
minimum operating pressures.  
Check Unit Safeties  
HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is  
provided to protect each compressor and refrigeration system  
from unsafe high pressure conditions. See Table 32 for high-  
pressure switch settings.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION  
the compressor section behind a panel with a vent plug so that  
outside air flows across the sensor tip.  
REPLACING THERMISTORS T1 and T2 — Add a small  
amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor well and  
end of probe. Thermistors are friction-fit thermistors, which  
must be slipped into receivers in the cooler (010-030) or fluid  
piping (032-055). For sizes 032-055, tighten the retaining nut  
¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 35.  
THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A  
high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this  
check.  
1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate  
themistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main  
Base Board (see Fig. 36).  
2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor tem-  
perature from Tables 33-36.  
3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at  
probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type tem-  
perature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to  
avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading.  
Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature  
determined from thermistor voltage reading should be  
close, ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermo-  
couple and taking readings.  
If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down  
and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature  
(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage  
drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by deter-  
mining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor  
disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the  
value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the  
Scrolling Marquee display.  
On medium temperature brine units, the brine must be  
properly mixed to prevent freezing at a temperature of at  
least 15 F (8.3 C) below the leaving-fluid temperature set  
point. Failure to provide the proper brine mixture is consid-  
ered abuse and may void the Sterling warranty.  
The Main Base Board (MBB) monitors leaving fluid tem-  
perature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of  
capacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the  
rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.  
When the cooler is exposed to lower ambient temperatures  
(34 F [1° C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using  
inhibited ethylene glycol.  
HEATER CABLE — Optional factory-installed cooler and/or  
hydronic package heaters are cycled based on the input from  
the outside-air temperature sensor. These heaters, when in-  
stalled, are designed to protect the cooler and/or hydronic pack-  
age from freezing down to –20 F (–29 C). Power for these heat-  
ers is supplied from the main unit power.  
The input from the low pressure transducer provides a back-  
up cooler freeze protection package. The MBB shuts down the  
unit when a low pressure condition exists that could cause the  
cooler to freeze up.  
Do not disconnect main unit power when servicing com-  
pressor(s) if ambient temperature is below 40 F (4.4 C).  
Each compressor manual starter has a lockout feature.  
Depress the Stop Button and pull the lockout tab from the  
start button. Secure lock in place. If power to the unit must  
be off for a prolonged period, drain the cooler, hydronic  
package (if installed) and internal piping. Add glycol  
according to WINTER SHUTDOWN Step 2 below.  
Pressure Transducers Suction and discharge pres-  
sure transducers are installed on each circuit. No pressure  
transducer calibration is required. The transducers operate on a  
5 vdc supply, which is generated by the Main Base Board  
(MBB). See Fig. 36 for transducer connections to the J8 con-  
nector on the MBB.  
WINTER SHUTDOWN — At the end of the cooling season:  
1. Drain the water/brine from the cooler, hydronic package  
(if installed) and internal piping.  
2. Fill the package with at least 2 gallons (7.6 L) of ethylene  
glycol or other suitable uninhibited antifreeze solution to  
prevent any residual water in the cooler and hydronic  
package/piping from freezing.  
3. At the beginning of the next cooling season, refill the  
cooler and add the recommended inhibitor.  
TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of be-  
ing faulty, first check the supply voltage to transducer. Supply  
voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct,  
compare pressure reading displayed on the Scrolling Marquee  
display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure  
gauge. Suction pressure should be within ± 2 psig. Discharge  
pressure should be within ± 5 psig. If the two readings are not  
reasonably close, replace the pressure transducer.  
Flow Sensor A flow switch is factory installed in the  
leaving fluid piping of all models. If the unit is equipped with  
an optional hydronic system, the flow switch is inside the  
pump cabinet. If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, fol-  
low the steps below to correct the situation:  
1. Check to confirm that the factory installed strainer is  
clean. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the  
screen and clean it. For the case of VFD controlled  
pumps, ensure that the minimum speed setting has not  
been changed.  
2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler or cooler/  
pump system and compare this to the system requirements.  
3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-  
minal block are secure.  
Thermistors Electronic control uses up to five 5 kΩ  
thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of  
the chiller. Thermistors T1, T2 and T9 are identical in their  
temperature and voltage drop performance. Accessory return  
gas thermistors are also 5 kthermistors used to troubleshoot  
TXV superheat settings. Thermistor T10 has a 10 kinput  
channel and has a different set of temperature vs. resistance and  
voltage drop performance. Resistance at various temperatures  
are listed in Tables 33-36.  
NOTE: For dual chiller operation, the control automatically  
configures the T10 input channel to be a 5 kchannel. A  
HH79NZ014 or HH79NZ029 thermistor should be used for  
dual chiller configurations.  
4. For factory-installed hydronic systems, verify that:  
Thermistor pin connection points are shown in Table 2. Ther-  
mistor T1 is located in a well at the bottom of the brazed plate  
heat exchanger for sizes 010-030 and in the leaving fluid pip-  
ing for sizes 032-055.  
Thermistor T2 is located in a well at the top of the brazed  
plate heat exchanger for sizes 010-030 and in the entering fluid  
piping for sizes 032-055. Thermistor T9 is factory installed in  
• All air has been purged from the system  
• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set  
5. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not  
providing sufficient flow.  
6. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise  
when viewed from motor end of pump.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 33 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop  
(Voltage Drop for Entering, Leaving Water and Outside-Air Thermistors T1, T2, T9)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
TEMP  
(F)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(F)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(F)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
59  
60  
1.982  
1.956  
1.930  
1.905  
1.879  
1.854  
1.829  
1.804  
1.779  
1.754  
1.729  
1.705  
1.681  
1.656  
1.632  
1.609  
1.585  
1.562  
1.538  
1.516  
1.493  
1.470  
1.448  
1.426  
1.404  
1.382  
1.361  
1.340  
1.319  
1.298  
1.278  
1.257  
1.237  
1.217  
1.198  
1.179  
1.160  
1.141  
1.122  
1.104  
1.086  
1.068  
1.051  
1.033  
1.016  
0.999  
0.983  
0.966  
0.950  
0.934  
0.918  
0.903  
0.888  
0.873  
0.858  
0.843  
0.829  
0.815  
0.801  
0.787  
0.774  
0.761  
0.748  
0.735  
0.723  
0.710  
0.698  
0.686  
0.674  
0.663  
0.651  
0.640  
0.629  
0.618  
0.608  
0.597  
0.587  
0.577  
0.567  
0.557  
0.548  
0.538  
0.529  
0.520  
7,686  
7,665  
7,468  
7,277  
7,091  
6,911  
6,735  
6,564  
6,399  
6,238  
6,081  
5,929  
5,781  
5,637  
5,497  
5,361  
5,229  
5,101  
4,976  
4,855  
4,737  
4,622  
4,511  
4,403  
4,298  
4,196  
4,096  
4,000  
3,906  
3,814  
3,726  
3,640  
3,556  
3,474  
3,395  
3,318  
3,243  
3,170  
3,099  
3,031  
2,964  
2,898  
2,835  
2,773  
2,713  
2,655  
2,597  
2,542  
2,488  
2,436  
2,385  
2,335  
2,286  
2,239  
2,192  
2,147  
2,103  
2,060  
2,018  
1,977  
1,937  
1,898  
1,860  
1,822  
1,786  
1,750  
1,715  
1,680  
1,647  
1,614  
1,582  
1,550  
1,519  
1,489  
1,459  
1,430  
1,401  
1,373  
1,345  
1,318  
1,291  
1,265  
1,240  
1,214  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
0.511  
0.502  
0.494  
0.485  
0.477  
0.469  
0.461  
0.453  
0.445  
0.438  
0.430  
0.423  
0.416  
0.408  
0.402  
0.395  
0.388  
0.381  
0.375  
0.369  
0.362  
0.356  
0.350  
0.344  
0.339  
0.333  
0.327  
0.322  
0.317  
0.311  
0.306  
0.301  
0.296  
0.291  
0.286  
0.282  
0.277  
0.272  
0.268  
0.264  
0.259  
0.255  
0.251  
0.247  
0.243  
0.239  
0.235  
0.231  
0.228  
0.224  
0.220  
0.217  
0.213  
0.210  
0.206  
0.203  
0.200  
0.197  
0.194  
0.191  
0.188  
0.185  
0.182  
0.179  
0.176  
0.173  
0.171  
0.168  
0.165  
0.163  
0.160  
0.158  
0.155  
0.153  
0.151  
0.148  
0.146  
0.144  
0.142  
0.140  
0.138  
0.135  
0.133  
1,190  
1,165  
1,141  
1,118  
1,095  
1,072  
1,050  
1,029  
1,007  
986  
965  
945  
925  
906  
887  
868  
850  
832  
815  
798  
782  
765  
750  
734  
719  
705  
690  
677  
663  
650  
638  
626  
614  
602  
591  
581  
570  
561  
551  
542  
533  
524  
516  
508  
501  
494  
487  
480  
473  
467  
461  
456  
450  
445  
439  
434  
429  
424  
419  
415  
410  
405  
401  
396  
391  
386  
382  
377  
372  
367  
361  
356  
350  
344  
338  
332  
325  
318  
311  
304  
297  
289  
282  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9  
8  
7  
6  
5  
4  
3  
2  
1  
0
3.699  
3.689  
3.679  
3.668  
3.658  
3.647  
3.636  
3.624  
3.613  
3.601  
3.588  
3.576  
3.563  
3.550  
3.536  
3.523  
3.509  
3.494  
3.480  
3.465  
3.450  
3.434  
3.418  
3.402  
3.386  
3.369  
3.352  
3.335  
3.317  
3.299  
3.281  
3.262  
3.243  
3.224  
3.205  
3.185  
3.165  
3.145  
3.124  
3.103  
3.082  
3.060  
3.038  
3.016  
2.994  
2.972  
2.949  
2.926  
2.903  
2.879  
2.856  
2.832  
2.808  
2.784  
2.759  
2.735  
2.710  
2.685  
2.660  
2.634  
2.609  
2.583  
2.558  
2.532  
2.506  
2.480  
2.454  
2.428  
2.402  
2.376  
2.349  
2.323  
2.296  
2.270  
2.244  
2.217  
2.191  
2.165  
2.138  
2.112  
2.086  
2.060  
2.034  
2.008  
98,010  
94,707  
91,522  
88,449  
85,486  
82,627  
79,871  
77,212  
74,648  
72,175  
69,790  
67,490  
65,272  
63,133  
61,070  
59,081  
57,162  
55,311  
53,526  
51,804  
50,143  
48,541  
46,996  
45,505  
44,066  
42,679  
41,339  
40,047  
38,800  
37,596  
36,435  
35,313  
34,231  
33,185  
32,176  
31,202  
30,260  
29,351  
28,473  
27,624  
26,804  
26,011  
25,245  
24,505  
23,789  
23,096  
22,427  
21,779  
21,153  
20,547  
19,960  
19,393  
18,843  
18,311  
17,796  
17,297  
16,814  
16,346  
15,892  
15,453  
15,027  
14,614  
14,214  
13,826  
13,449  
13,084  
12,730  
12,387  
12,053  
11,730  
11,416  
11,112  
10,816  
10,529  
10,250  
9,979  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
1
86  
2
87  
3
88  
4
89  
5
90  
6
91  
7
92  
8
93  
9
94  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
9,717  
9,461  
9,213  
8,973  
8,739  
8,511  
8,291  
8,076  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 34 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop  
(Voltage Drop for Entering, Leaving Water and Outside-Air Thermistors T1, T2, T9)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
TEMP  
(C)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(C)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(C)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
1.982  
1.935  
1.889  
1.844  
1.799  
1.754  
1.710  
1.666  
1.623  
1.580  
1.538  
1.497  
1.457  
1.417  
1.378  
1.340  
1.302  
1.265  
1.229  
1.194  
1.160  
1.126  
1.093  
1.061  
1.030  
0.999  
0.969  
0.940  
0.912  
0.885  
0.858  
0.832  
0.807  
0.782  
0.758  
0.735  
0.713  
0.691  
0.669  
0.649  
0.629  
0.610  
0.591  
0.573  
0.555  
0.538  
0.522  
7,855  
7,499  
7,161  
6,840  
6,536  
6,246  
5,971  
5,710  
5,461  
5,225  
5,000  
4,786  
4,583  
4,389  
4,204  
4,028  
3,861  
3,701  
3,549  
3,404  
3,266  
3,134  
3,008  
2,888  
2,773  
2,663  
2,559  
2,459  
2,363  
2,272  
2,184  
2,101  
2,021  
1,944  
1,871  
1,801  
1,734  
1,670  
1,609  
1,550  
1,493  
1,439  
1,387  
1,337  
1,290  
1,244  
1,200  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
0.506  
0.490  
0.475  
0.461  
0.447  
0.433  
0.420  
0.407  
0.395  
0.383  
0.371  
0.360  
0.349  
0.339  
0.329  
0.319  
0.309  
0.300  
0.291  
0.283  
0.274  
0.266  
0.258  
0.251  
0.244  
0.237  
0.230  
0.223  
0.217  
0.211  
0.204  
0.199  
0.193  
0.188  
0.182  
0.177  
0.172  
0.168  
0.163  
0.158  
0.154  
0.150  
0.146  
0.142  
0.138  
0.134  
1,158  
1,118  
1,079  
1,041  
1,006  
971  
938  
906  
876  
836  
805  
775  
747  
719  
693  
669  
645  
623  
602  
583  
564  
547  
531  
516  
502  
489  
477  
466  
456  
446  
436  
427  
419  
410  
402  
393  
385  
376  
367  
357  
346  
335  
324  
312  
299  
285  
32  
3.705  
3.687  
3.668  
3.649  
3.629  
3.608  
3.586  
3.563  
3.539  
3.514  
3.489  
3.462  
3.434  
3.406  
3.376  
3.345  
3.313  
3.281  
3.247  
3.212  
3.177  
3.140  
3.103  
3.065  
3.025  
2.985  
2.945  
2.903  
2.860  
2.817  
2.774  
2.730  
2.685  
2.639  
2.593  
2.547  
2.500  
2.454  
2.407  
2.360  
2.312  
2.265  
2.217  
2.170  
2.123  
2.076  
2.029  
100,260  
94,165  
88,480  
83,170  
78,125  
73,580  
69,250  
65,205  
61,420  
57,875  
54,555  
51,450  
48,536  
45,807  
43,247  
40,845  
38,592  
38,476  
34,489  
32,621  
30,866  
29,216  
27,633  
26,202  
24,827  
23,532  
22,313  
21,163  
20,079  
19,058  
18,094  
17,184  
16,325  
15,515  
14,749  
14,026  
13,342  
12,696  
12,085  
11,506  
10,959  
10,441  
9,949  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9  
8  
7  
6  
5  
4  
3  
2  
1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
9,485  
12  
9,044  
13  
8,627  
14  
8,231  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 35 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop  
(For Thermistor T10)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
TEMP  
(F)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(F)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(F)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9  
8  
7  
6  
5  
4  
3  
2  
1  
0
4.758  
4.750  
4.741  
4.733  
4.724  
4.715  
4.705  
4.696  
4.686  
4.676  
4.665  
4.655  
4.644  
4.633  
4.621  
4.609  
4.597  
4.585  
4.572  
4.560  
4.546  
4.533  
4.519  
4.505  
4.490  
4.476  
4.461  
4.445  
4.429  
4.413  
4.397  
4.380  
4.363  
4.346  
4.328  
4.310  
4.292  
4.273  
4.254  
4.235  
4.215  
4.195  
4.174  
4.153  
4.132  
4.111  
4.089  
4.067  
4.044  
4.021  
3.998  
3.975  
3.951  
3.927  
3.903  
3.878  
3.853  
3.828  
3.802  
3.776  
3.750  
3.723  
3.697  
3.670  
3.654  
3.615  
3.587  
3.559  
3.531  
3.503  
3.474  
3.445  
3.416  
3.387  
3.357  
3.328  
3.298  
3.268  
3.238  
3.208  
3.178  
3.147  
3.117  
3.086  
3.056  
3.025  
196,453  
189,692  
183,300  
177,000  
171,079  
165,238  
159,717  
154,344  
149,194  
144,250  
139,443  
134,891  
130,402  
126,183  
122,018  
118,076  
114,236  
110,549  
107,006  
103,558  
100,287  
97,060  
94,020  
91,019  
88,171  
85,396  
82,729  
80,162  
77,662  
75,286  
72,940  
70,727  
68,542  
66,465  
64,439  
62,491  
60,612  
58,781  
57,039  
55,319  
53,693  
52,086  
50,557  
49,065  
47,627  
46,240  
44,888  
43,598  
42,324  
41,118  
39,926  
38,790  
37,681  
36,610  
35,577  
34,569  
33,606  
32,654  
31,752  
30,860  
30,009  
29,177  
28,373  
27,597  
26,838  
26,113  
25,396  
24,715  
24,042  
23,399  
22,770  
22,161  
21,573  
20,998  
20,447  
19,903  
19,386  
18,874  
18,384  
17,904  
17,441  
16,991  
16,552  
16,131  
15,714  
15,317  
61  
62  
2.994  
2.963  
2.932  
2.901  
2.870  
2.839  
2.808  
2.777  
2.746  
2.715  
2.684  
2.653  
2.622  
2.592  
2.561  
2.530  
2.500  
2.470  
2.439  
2.409  
2.379  
2.349  
2.319  
2.290  
2.260  
2.231  
2.202  
2.173  
2.144  
2.115  
2.087  
2.059  
2.030  
2.003  
1.975  
1.948  
1.921  
1.894  
1.867  
1.841  
1.815  
1.789  
1.763  
1.738  
1.713  
1.688  
1.663  
1.639  
1.615  
1.591  
1.567  
1.544  
1.521  
1.498  
1.475  
1.453  
1.431  
1.409  
1.387  
1.366  
1.345  
1.324  
1.304  
1.284  
1.264  
1.244  
1.225  
1.206  
1.187  
1.168  
1.150  
1.132  
1.114  
1.096  
1.079  
1.062  
1.045  
1.028  
1.012  
0.996  
0.980  
0.965  
0.949  
0.934  
0.919  
0.905  
14,925  
14,549  
14,180  
13,824  
13,478  
13,139  
12,814  
12,493  
12,187  
11,884  
11,593  
11,308  
11,031  
10,764  
10,501  
10,249  
10,000  
9,762  
9,526  
9,300  
9,078  
8,862  
8,653  
8,448  
8,251  
8,056  
7,869  
7,685  
7,507  
7,333  
7,165  
6,999  
6,838  
6,683  
6,530  
6,383  
6,238  
6,098  
5,961  
5,827  
5,698  
5,571  
5,449  
5,327  
5,210  
5,095  
4,984  
4,876  
4,769  
4,666  
4,564  
4,467  
4,370  
4,277  
4,185  
4,096  
4,008  
3,923  
3,840  
3,759  
3,681  
3,603  
3,529  
3,455  
3,383  
3,313  
3,244  
3,178  
3,112  
3,049  
2,986  
2,926  
2,866  
2,809  
2,752  
2,697  
2,643  
2,590  
2,539  
2,488  
2,439  
2,391  
2,343  
2,297  
2,253  
2,209  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
0.890  
0.876  
0.862  
0.848  
0.835  
0.821  
0.808  
0.795  
0.782  
0.770  
0.758  
0.745  
0.733  
0.722  
0.710  
0.699  
0.687  
0.676  
0.666  
0.655  
0.645  
0.634  
0.624  
0.614  
0.604  
0.595  
0.585  
0.576  
0.567  
0.558  
0.549  
0.540  
0.532  
0.523  
0.515  
0.507  
0.499  
0.491  
0.483  
0.476  
0.468  
0.461  
0.454  
0.447  
0.440  
0.433  
0.426  
0.419  
0.413  
0.407  
0.400  
0.394  
0.388  
0.382  
0.376  
0.370  
0.365  
0.359  
0.354  
0.349  
0.343  
0.338  
0.333  
0.328  
0.323  
0.318  
0.314  
0.309  
0.305  
0.300  
0.296  
0.292  
0.288  
0.284  
0.279  
0.275  
0.272  
0.268  
0.264  
2,166  
2,124  
2,083  
2,043  
2,003  
1,966  
1,928  
1,891  
1,855  
1,820  
1,786  
1,752  
1,719  
1,687  
1,656  
1,625  
1,594  
1,565  
1,536  
1,508  
1,480  
1,453  
1,426  
1,400  
1,375  
1,350  
1,326  
1,302  
1,278  
1,255  
1,233  
1,211  
1,190  
1,169  
1,148  
1,128  
1,108  
1,089  
1,070  
1,052  
1,033  
1,016  
998  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
1
87  
2
88  
3
89  
4
90  
5
91  
6
92  
7
93  
8
94  
9
95  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
981  
964  
947  
931  
915  
900  
885  
870  
855  
841  
827  
814  
800  
787  
774  
762  
749  
737  
725  
714  
702  
691  
680  
670  
659  
649  
639  
629  
620  
610  
601  
592  
583  
574  
566  
557  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 36 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop  
(For Thermistor T10)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
VOLTAGE  
DROP  
(V)  
TEMP  
(C)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(C)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
TEMP  
(C)  
RESISTANCE  
(Ohms)  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9  
4.762  
4.748  
4.733  
4.716  
4.700  
4.682  
4.663  
4.644  
4.624  
4.602  
4.580  
4.557  
4.533  
4.508  
4.482  
4.455  
4.426  
4.397  
4.367  
4.335  
4.303  
4.269  
4.235  
4.199  
4.162  
4.124  
4.085  
4.044  
4.003  
3.961  
3.917  
3.873  
3.828  
3.781  
3.734  
3.686  
3.637  
3.587  
3.537  
3.485  
3.433  
3.381  
3.328  
3.274  
3.220  
3.165  
3.111  
200,510  
188,340  
177,000  
166,342  
156,404  
147,134  
138,482  
130,402  
122,807  
115,710  
109,075  
102,868  
97,060  
91,588  
86,463  
81,662  
77,162  
72,940  
68,957  
65,219  
61,711  
58,415  
55,319  
52,392  
49,640  
47,052  
44,617  
42,324  
40,153  
38,109  
36,182  
34,367  
32,654  
31,030  
29,498  
28,052  
26,686  
25,396  
24,171  
23,013  
21,918  
20,883  
19,903  
18,972  
18,090  
17,255  
16,464  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
3.056  
3.000  
2.944  
2.889  
2.833  
2.777  
2.721  
2.666  
2.610  
2.555  
2.500  
2.445  
2.391  
2.337  
2.284  
2.231  
2.178  
2.127  
2.075  
2.025  
1.975  
1.926  
1.878  
1.830  
1.784  
1.738  
1.692  
1.648  
1.605  
1.562  
1.521  
1.480  
1.439  
1.400  
1.362  
1.324  
1.288  
1.252  
1.217  
1.183  
1.150  
1.117  
1.086  
1.055  
1.025  
0.996  
0.968  
15,714  
15,000  
14,323  
13,681  
13,071  
12,493  
11,942  
11,418  
10,921  
10,449  
10,000  
9,571  
9,164  
8,776  
8,407  
8,056  
7,720  
7,401  
7,096  
6,806  
6,530  
6,266  
6,014  
5,774  
5,546  
5,327  
5,117  
4,918  
4,727  
4,544  
4,370  
4,203  
4,042  
3,889  
3,743  
3,603  
3,469  
3,340  
3,217  
3,099  
2,986  
2,878  
2,774  
2,675  
2,579  
2,488  
2,400  
62  
63  
0.940  
0.913  
0.887  
0.862  
0.837  
0.813  
0.790  
0.767  
0.745  
0.724  
0.703  
0.683  
0.663  
0.645  
0.626  
0.608  
0.591  
0.574  
0.558  
0.542  
0.527  
0.512  
0.497  
0.483  
0.470  
0.457  
0.444  
0.431  
0.419  
0.408  
0.396  
0.386  
0.375  
0.365  
0.355  
0.345  
0.336  
0.327  
0.318  
0.310  
0.302  
0.294  
0.287  
0.279  
0.272  
0.265  
2,315  
2,235  
2,157  
2,083  
2,011  
1,943  
1,876  
1,813  
1,752  
1,693  
1,637  
1,582  
1,530  
1,480  
1,431  
1,385  
1,340  
1,297  
1,255  
1,215  
1,177  
1,140  
1,104  
1,070  
1,037  
1,005  
974  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
8  
86  
7  
87  
6  
88  
5  
89  
944  
4  
90  
915  
3  
91  
889  
2  
92  
861  
1  
93  
836  
0
94  
811  
1
95  
787  
2
96  
764  
3
97  
742  
4
98  
721  
5
99  
700  
6
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
680  
7
661  
8
643  
9
626  
10  
609  
11  
592  
12  
576  
13  
561  
14  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Strainer Periodic factory-installed strainer cleaning is  
required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi  
(21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pres-  
sure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the factory-  
installed blowdown valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut  
the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean. When  
strainer has been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for strainer maintenance  
done (S.T.MN) [Run Status, PM].  
FLUID-SIDE TEMPERATURE SENSORS (T1 AND T2)  
NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are in millimeters.  
Motormaster® V Controller The optional or ac-  
cessory Motormaster V controller uses a 0 to 5 vdc signal  
input from a pressure transducer attached to the liquid line ser-  
vice valve gage port on each circuit. See Fig. 37. The pressure  
transducer is connected to terminals 2, 5 and 6 on the control-  
ler. The controller is factory configured and requires no field  
programming. If a situation arises where the drive does not  
function properly, the information provided below and  
Table 37 can be used to troubleshoot the drive.  
Fig. 35 Fluid-Side Temperature Sensors  
(T1 and T2)  
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period  
of time exceeding three years (due to storage, etc.), the  
electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change  
internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can  
result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is  
operated after such a long period of inactivity or storage. In  
order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for  
operation after a long period of inactivity, apply input  
power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating  
the motor. Before attempting to operate the drive, motor,  
and driven equipment, be sure all procedures pertaining to  
installation and wiring have been properly followed.  
DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals  
T1, T2, and T3! Severe damage to the drive will result. Do  
not continuously cycle input power to the drive more than  
once every two minutes. Damage to the drive will result.  
Fig. 36 Thermistor Connections to  
Main Base Board, J8 Connector  
Hazard of electrical shock! Wait three minutes after discon-  
necting incoming power before servicing drive. Capacitors  
retain charge after power is removed. Drive assembly  
includes externally mounted current limiting resistors. Use  
extreme caution when servicing the drive.  
bring the pressure down to the set point. When the VFD is at  
full speed, it acts just like a fixed speed fan.  
When the ambient air temperature drops, a fan running at  
full speed draws too much air across the condenser coil to  
maintain a minimum condensing pressure/temperature. In  
these conditions, the VFD will slow down and begin to main-  
tain a set point.  
The VFD will display the set point as the default. The set  
point is displayed in speed as Hz and is configured by the start  
command jumper as detailed in Fig. 38.  
When configured as shown below, this equipment is  
designed to start when it receives line power. Ensure that  
all personnel are clear of fans and guards are installed  
before applying power.  
Motormaster V control can also be configured to follow an  
external control system to perform the PI control functions. See  
configuration section for details.  
The real-time feedback signal (liquid line pressure, in volts)  
is displayed by viewing parameter 69. The real-time output fre-  
quency is displayed by viewing parameter 71.  
SET POINTS — Operating modes are configured for R-22  
with a set point of 135 psig on the liquid line.  
INSTALLATION — See Fig. 38 for transducer wiring to the  
VFD.  
GENERAL OPERATION — This control varies condenser  
fan speed based on liquid pressure. The control is a Variable  
Frequency Drive (VFD) and is only compatible with motors  
rated for use with VFDs. The accompanying pressure transduc-  
er has a 0 to 5 v output range corresponding to a –40 to 460 psi  
range. The VFD provides a 5 v output for the transducer on  
pin 6.  
This system is a reverse acting, proportional-integral (PI)  
control. The VFD will vary the motor speed to drive the liquid  
line pressure to the set point during ambient temperatures be-  
low 60 F. The set point is lower than a normal operating pres-  
sure during summer operation. At higher ambient tempera-  
tures, the fan will go to full speed (60 Hz or 50 Hz depending  
on model) and remain there since it can not go fast enough to  
NOTE: The drive is phase insensitive with respect to incoming  
line voltage. This means that the VFD will operate with any  
phase sequence of the incoming three-phase voltage.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PROGRAMMING  
To change password: first enter the current password then  
change parameter P44 to the desired password.  
To disable automatic control mode and enter manual speed  
control mode:  
1. Change P05 to ‘01- keypad’.  
2. Push UP and DOWN arrow key to set manual speed.  
3. Set P05 to ‘05 - R22’ to restore automatic control.  
To provide manual start/stop control:  
With power removed from VFD, remove start command  
jumper and install a switch between the appropriate start termi-  
nals as required in Fig 37.  
EPM CHIP — The drive uses a electronic programming mod-  
ule (EPM) chip to store the program parameters. This is an EE-  
PROM memory chip and is accessible from the front of the  
VFD. It should not be removed with power applied to the  
VFD.  
It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any  
programming without consulting Sterling service personnel.  
Unit damage may occur from improper programming.  
Motormaster V control is completely configured according to  
the inputs provided. No additional programming is necessary.  
The drive can display 71 program parameters. Parameters  
50-60 are monitor functions and cannot be changed. The  
remainder of the parameters can be changed after entering a  
password.  
To enter password and change program values:  
1. Press Mode.  
2. Upper right decimal point blinks.  
LIQUID LINE PRESSURE SET POINT ADJUST-  
MENT — Adjusting the set point is not recommended due to  
possible interaction with other head pressure software algo-  
rithms or controls. In situations where the set point must be  
changed, the set point for R-22 is found in P34. A higher value  
will result in a higher liquid line set point. Example: increasing  
the factory default (P34) set point from 18.0 to 19.0 will in-  
crease the liquid line pressure by approximately 10 psi.  
LOSS OF SCN COMMUNICATIONS — Sterlco Comfort  
Network (SCN) communications with external control  
systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise gen-  
erated by the Motormaster V control. Ensure unit is well  
grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication  
lines.  
If communications are lost only while Motormaster V con-  
trol is in operation, order a signal isolator (CEAS420876-2)  
and power supplies (CEAS221045-01, 2 required) for the SCN  
communication line.  
Fault Codes — The drive is programmed to automatically re-  
start after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a  
fault (the drive will not restart after CF, cF, GF, F1, F2-F9, or  
Fo faults). If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful, the  
drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC), which requires a  
manual reset.  
3. Display reads “00” (see Fig. 37). To enter the PRO-  
GRAM mode to access the parameters, press the Mode  
button (see Fig. 37). This will activate the PASSWORD  
prompt (if the password has not been disabled). The dis-  
play will read “00” and the upper right-hand decimal  
point will be blinking.  
4. Use the  
and  
buttons to scroll to the password  
value (the factory default password is “111”) and press  
the Mode button. Once the correct password value is en-  
tered, the display will read “P01”, which indicates that the  
PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning of  
the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter).  
NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”, the password was incorrect,  
and the process to enter the password must be repeated.  
5. Press Mode to display present parameter setting.  
Upper right decimal point blinks.  
Use the  
and  
buttons to scroll to the desired  
parameter number.  
Once the desired parameter number is found, press the  
Mode button to display the present parameter setting. The up-  
per right-hand decimal point will begin blinking, indicating  
that the present parameter setting is being displayed, and that it  
can be changed by using the up and down buttons. Use  
and  
to change setting. Press Mode to store new setting.  
NOTE: Since faults may be reset as incoming power is cycled,  
you may need to observe current fault code before the Sterling  
unit control turns off the VFD. Most recent faults can be  
accessed using parameter 50. If necessary, remove start jumper  
and energize condenser fan contactor using Service Test. This  
will allow programming and access to fault history.  
Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit  
the PROGRAM mode. To change another parameter, press the  
Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the param-  
eter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last  
viewed or changed before exiting). If the Mode key is pressed  
within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode, the pass-  
word is not required access the parameters. After two minutes,  
the password must be entered in order to access the parameters  
again.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L1  
L2  
L3  
Mode  
DANGER  
MMV  
TERMINAL  
BLOCK  
T1  
B+  
T2 T3 B-  
DISPLAY  
BUTTONS  
Mode  
Fig. 37 Motormaster® V Mode Buttons and Mode Display  
MMV  
TERMINAL  
BLOCK  
1
2
5
6
11  
12  
2
14  
13A  
13B  
13C  
15  
25  
2
30  
31  
TXA  
TXB  
COM  
+5V  
NOMINAL  
VOLTAGE  
CONTROL INPUT  
(PIN 5)  
START  
JUMPER  
SETPOINT  
JUMPER  
MODE  
Hz  
REFRIGERANT  
208*/230/  
460/575  
Internal PI control,  
0-5V feedback  
Internal PI control,  
0-5V feedback  
Internal PI control,  
0-5V feedback  
Internal PI control,  
0-5V feedback  
1
2
3
4
60  
60  
50  
50  
TB1-TB2  
None  
208*/230  
230  
TB13A-TB2  
TB13B-TB2  
TB13C-TB2  
None  
None  
None  
R-22  
380/415  
*At 208 v, the drive can run in either mode.  
Fig. 38 Pressure Transducer and Start Command Jumper Wiring  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 37 Fault Codes  
FAULT CODE  
DESCRIPTION  
SOLUTION  
AF  
CF  
cF  
High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high;  
Cooling fan has failed (if equipped).  
Control Fault: A blank EPM, or an EPM with corrupted data Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 —  
has been installed. PROGRAM SELECTION.  
Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parame- Either remove the EPM or perform a factory  
ter version has been installed.  
Check cooling fan operation  
reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter  
version of the EPM to match the parameter  
version of the drive.  
CL  
CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the  
CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is  
Check for loose electrical connections.  
Check for faulty condenser fan motor.  
reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current. Check Parameter P25 from Table 38 is set cor-  
If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long, it can trip rectly.  
into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).  
GF  
HF  
JF  
Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are  
corrupted.  
High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high; Decel- Check line voltage set P01 appropriately  
eration rate is too fast; Overhauling load.  
Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out, indicating  
that the serial link has been lost.  
Restore factory defaults P48, see section  
above. If that does not work, replace EPM.  
Check serial connection (computer)  
Check settings for PXX.  
Check settings in communication software to  
match PXX.  
LF  
Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low.  
Check line voltage set P01 appropriately  
OF  
Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground Reduce boost or increase acceleration values.  
short circuit on the output; Failed output transistor; Boost  
settings are too high; Acceleration rate is too fast.  
If unsuccessful, replace drive.  
PF  
SF  
Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the applica- Check line voltage set P01 appropriately  
tion; Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.  
Check for dirty coils  
Check for motor bearing failure  
Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been  
applied to a three-phase drive.  
Check input power phasing  
F1  
EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged.  
F2-F9, Fo  
Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem  
Consult factory  
Drive display = 60.0 even though it Feedback signal is above set point  
is cold outside and it should be run-  
ning slower  
Check for proper set point  
Check liquid line pressure  
Drive display = ---even though  
drive should be running  
Start jumper is missing  
Replace start jumper. See section above  
Drive display = 8.0 even though fan Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at minimum  
Check for proper set point  
Check liquid line pressure  
should be running faster  
VFD flashes 57 and LCS  
speed  
Feedback or speed signal lost. Drive will operate at 57 Hz In stand alone mode: Check transducer wiring  
until reset or loss of start command. Resetting requires  
cycling start command (or power).  
and feedback voltage. Feedback voltage dis-  
played on P-69. Pin 6 should be 5 v output.  
Pin 5 (feedback) should be somewhere  
between 0 and 5 v.  
Manual Reset — If fault condition has been removed, cycle  
power to the chiller to reset the VFD.  
P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current  
rating  
P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input:  
100 will indicate full scale which is 5 v  
P56 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input.  
20% = 4 mA, 100% = 20 mA  
Troubleshooting — Troubleshooting the Motormaster® V  
control requires a combination of observing system operation  
and VFD information. The drive provides 2 kinds of trouble-  
shooting modes: a status matrix using the 3-digit display  
(P57, P58) and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs.  
The collective group is displayed through parameters  
50-60 and all values are read-only.  
Manual Starter Trip — If the VFD manual starter (MS-FC-  
HS, MS-FC-A1 or MS-FC-B1 depending on model) trips,  
locate the inrush current protectors (3 round black disks per  
motor) and verify their resistance. For units operating at 208 v  
or 230 v, these devices should measure approximately 7 ohms.  
For all other voltages, they should measure approximately  
20 ohms. Check value with mating plug disconnected, power  
to chiller off and at ambient temperature (not hot immediately  
after stopping VFD). These are standard resistances at 77 F  
(25 C). Resistance values decrease at higher temperatures and  
increase at lower temperatures.  
P50: FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults  
P51: SOFTWARE version  
P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal.  
Usually rated input voltage x 1.4  
P53: MOTOR VOLAGE — in percent of rated output  
voltage  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 38 Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes  
MODE  
1
MODE  
2
MODE  
3
MODE  
4
PARAMETERS  
DESCRIPTION  
P01  
P02  
P03  
P04  
Line Voltage: 01 = low line, 02 = high line  
Sterlco Freq: 01 = 4 kHz, 02 = 6 kHz, 03 = 8 kHz  
Startup mode: flying restart  
01  
01  
06  
01  
02  
01  
06  
01  
01  
01  
06  
01  
02  
01  
06  
01  
Stop mode: coast to stop  
Standard Speed source: 01= keypad,  
04=4-20mA (NO PI), 05= R22, 06=R134a  
P05  
05  
05  
05  
05  
P06  
P08  
P09  
P10  
P11  
P12  
P13  
P14  
P15  
P16  
P17  
P19  
P20  
P21  
P22  
P23  
P24  
P25  
P26  
P27  
P28  
P29  
P30  
P31  
P32  
P33  
TB-14 output: 01 = none  
TB-30 output: 01 = none  
TB-31 Output: 01 = none  
TB-13A function sel: 01 = none  
TB-13B function sel: 01 = none  
TB-13C function sel: 01 = none  
TB-15 output: 01 = none  
Control: 01 = Terminal strip  
Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600,8,N,2 with timer  
Units editing: 02 = whole units  
Rotation: 01 = forward only, 03 = reverse only  
Acceleration time: 10 sec  
Deceleration time: 10 sec  
DC brake time: 0  
DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0%  
Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 160 rpm  
Max freq  
Current limit: (%)  
Motor overload: 100  
Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz  
Fixed boost: 0.5% at low frequencies  
Accel boost: 0%  
Slip compensation: 0%  
Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal  
Preset spd #2: 0  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
02  
02  
01  
10  
10  
0
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
02  
02  
01  
10  
10  
0
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
02  
02  
01  
10  
10  
0
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
02  
02  
01  
10  
10  
0
0
8
0
8
0
8
0
8
60  
125  
100  
60  
0.5  
0
0
57  
0
60  
110  
100  
60  
0.5  
0
0
57  
0
50  
125  
100  
50  
0.5  
0
0
47  
0
50  
110  
100  
50  
0.5  
0
0
47  
0
Preset spd #3: 0  
0
0
0
0
Preset spd 4 default R22 set point.  
P34  
P35  
18.0  
12.6  
18.0  
12.6  
18.0  
12.6  
18.0  
12.6  
TB12-2 open  
Preset spd 5 default R134a set point.  
TB12-2 closed  
P36  
P37  
P38  
P39  
P40  
P41  
P42  
P43  
P44  
Preset spd 6 default  
Preset spd 7 default  
Skip bandwidth  
Speed scaling  
Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz  
Load scaling: default (not used so NA)  
Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA)  
Serial address  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
60  
200  
60  
1
60  
200  
60  
1
50  
200  
60  
1
50  
200  
60  
1
Password:111  
111  
111  
111  
111  
Speed at min signal: 8 Hz; used when PID  
mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA  
Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. Used  
when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA  
P45  
P46  
8
8
8
8
60  
60  
50  
50  
P47  
P48  
P61  
P62  
P63  
P64  
P65  
P66  
P67  
P68  
Clear history? 01 = maintain. (set to 02 to clear)  
Program selection: Program 1 12  
PI Mode: 05= reverse, 0-5V, 01 = no PID  
Min feedback = 0 (0V *10)  
Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10)  
Proportional gain = 4%  
Integral gain = .2  
PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5  
Min alarm  
01  
01  
05  
0
50  
4
.2  
5
0
01  
02  
05  
0
50  
4
.2  
5
0
01  
03  
05  
0
50  
4
.2  
5
0
01  
04  
05  
0
50  
4
.2  
5
0
Max alarm  
0
0
0
0
LEGEND  
NA Not Applicable  
PID Proportional Integral Derivative  
TB Terminal Block  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES — The Comfort-  
Linkreplacement modules are shown in Table 39. If the Main  
Base Board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all configura-  
tion data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table and  
verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and OPT2  
are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or op-  
tions (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well  
as any specific time and maintenance schedules.  
Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30RA Liquid Chillers  
(completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder.  
This information is needed later in this procedure. If the check-  
list does not exist, fill out the current information in the Config-  
uration mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and  
configurations as needed for this particular installation.  
information, each factory-installed hydronic package is sup-  
plied with a packet of information supplied by the manufactur-  
er, Bell & Gossett. Sterling/Sterlco strongly recommends  
that this information be thoroughly reviewed prior to operation  
of the chiller.  
PUMP PERFORMANCE CHECK — The factory-installed  
pumps in the 30RA units are shipped with a single impeller  
size available for that pump. The pump was selected based on  
the flow and head requirements as provided to Sterling. It is not  
uncommon for actual pump duty to be different than what was  
anticipated at time of selection. In many cases, it may be desir-  
able to make some field modifications to obtain optimum  
pump performance.  
Before any pump modifications are made, it is recommend-  
ed that actual pump performance be verified and compared to  
the applicable pump curve. See base unit installation instruc-  
tions. This can be done in a variety of ways:  
Electrical shock can cause personal injury. Disconnect all  
electrical power before servicing.  
1. If pump impeller diameter is known:  
a. Connect a differential pressure gage across the  
pump at the ports provided on the pump volutes.  
b. Read GPM from applicable impeller curve.  
2. If pump impeller diameter is not known:  
1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect  
all wires from the defective module by unplugging its  
connectors.  
2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting  
screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the  
module from the control box. Save the screws later use.  
3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switch-  
es (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the  
defective module.  
NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to avoid  
electrostatic discharge.  
If pump impeller diameter has been trimmed and the size  
is not known, it is necessary to determine which impeller  
curve to read.  
The easiest way to confirm pump performance is to  
“dead-head” the pump and read the differential pressure  
across the pressure ports on the pump. “Dead-heading”  
can be done by shutting the circuit setter valve on the dis-  
charge side of the pump.  
4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new  
module for return to Sterling.  
5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a  
Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.  
6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator  
replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the  
LEN connector.  
7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring  
power.  
8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch  
is in the OFF position.  
9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs  
blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking  
and that the Scrolling Marquee or Navigator display is  
communicating correctly.  
10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points  
and schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE  
CONTACT switch to its previous position.  
NOTE: Although not all pumps can be safely “dead-  
headed”, centrifugal pumps (such as on the 30RA units)  
can be “dead-headed” for short amounts of time. It is rec-  
ommended to keep the time short due to excessive heat  
build-up in the pump.  
Since the “dead-head” condition is a no-flow condition,  
the head will correspond to the intersection of an impel-  
ler curve with the vertical axis of the pump chart. The  
correct impeller diameter is that which corresponds to the  
measured head.  
3. Once the impeller diameter is known, proceed as in  
Step 1.  
4. Water flow rate can be determined by using a differential  
pressure gage with the Bell & Gossett circuit setter bal-  
ance valve calculator. (This information is also provided  
in the installation instructions.) This method will not di-  
rectly measure pressure differential seen by the pump, but  
can be used to “double-check” the pump measurement.  
5. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-  
minal block are secure.  
Table 39 Replacement Modules  
6. For factory-installed hydronic system, verify that:  
REPLACEMENTPART REPLACEMENT PART  
MODULE  
NO. (with Software) NO. (without Software)  
• All air has been purged from the system.  
• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.  
7. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not  
providing sufficient flow.  
8. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise  
when viewed from motor end of pump.  
PUMP MODIFICATIONS AND IMPELLER TRIMMING  
— See applicable section in the Installation instructions.  
RESET OF CHILLER WATER FLOW — See applicable sec-  
tion in the Installation instructions.  
Main Base  
30RA501102  
HK50AA031  
HK50AA029  
HK50AA030  
Board (MBB)  
Scrolling  
Marquee  
Display  
Energy  
Management  
Module  
30GT515218  
HK50AA033  
HK50AA028  
N/A  
(EMM)  
Navigator  
Display  
CHANGING OF PUMP SEALS — See Bell & Gossett ser-  
vice instruction manual provided with the hydronic package.  
Hydronic Package If the unit is equipped with a  
factory-installed hydronic package, consult the information be-  
low for proper maintenance and service. In addition to this  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly in-  
stalled and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.  
2. Use the Scrolling Marquee display to adjust the Cooling  
Set Point.  
3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-  
mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to  
be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the sys-  
tem. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature  
below 40 F (4.4 C) or outdoor temperatures are expected  
to be below 32 F (0° C), a brine of sufficient concentra-  
tion must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated  
suction temperatures. See Table 40.  
MAINTENANCE  
Recommended Maintenance Schedule The fol-  
lowing are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions  
may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often  
than recommended.  
Routine:  
For machines with E-coat Condenser Coils:  
Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary  
with Sterling approved coil cleaner.  
Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and  
industrial applications.  
Every month:  
4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.  
Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary  
5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sightglass(es).  
See Fig. 39. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is  
from ¼ to ¾ of sight glass. Adjust the oil level as re-  
quired. See Check Oil Charge section on page 60 for  
Sterling approved oils.  
with Sterling approved coil cleaner.  
Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig-  
erant loss and presence of moisture.  
Every 3 months (for all machines):  
6. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.  
Check refrigerant charge.  
Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant  
leaks, repair as necessary.  
7. All condenser fan and factory installed hydronic package  
pump motors are three phase. Check for proper rotation  
of condenser fans first BEFORE attempting to start  
pumps or compressors. To reverse rotation, interchange  
any two of the main incoming power leads.  
8. Be sure system is fully charged with refrigerant (see  
Check Refrigerant Charge section on page 75).  
Check chilled water flow switch operation.  
Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary  
with Sterling approved coil cleaner.  
Check all condenser fans for proper operation.  
Check compressor oil level.  
Check crankcase heater operation.  
9. If unit is a brine unit, check to ensure proper brine con-  
centration is used to prevent freezing.  
Every 12 months (for all machines):  
Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.  
Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.  
Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than  
± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.  
Obtain and test an oil sample. Change oil only if  
necessary.  
Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-  
freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.  
Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.  
Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure  
drop, replace as necessary.  
Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.  
Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.  
Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they  
are securely fastened to the motor shaft.  
Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all  
components.  
10. Verify proper operation of cooler and hydronic package  
heaters (if installed). Heaters operate at the same voltage  
as the main incoming power supply and are single phase.  
Heater current is approximately .4 amps for 380, 400, 460  
and 575 v units. Heater current is approximately .8 amps  
for 230 v units.  
Table 40 Minimum Cooler Flow Rates and  
Minimum Loop Volume  
COOLER MINIMUM  
FLOW  
MINIMUM COOLER  
LOOP VOLUME  
UNIT SIZE  
30RA  
Gpm  
12  
16  
19  
26  
29  
33  
42  
45  
48  
52  
57  
65  
L/s  
.76  
Gal.  
40  
L
010  
015  
018  
022  
025  
030  
035  
040  
042  
045  
050  
055  
151.2  
207.9  
181.4  
245.7  
268.3  
309.3  
393.1  
449.8  
427.1  
487.6  
536.6  
616.1  
1.01  
1.20  
1.64  
1.83  
2.08  
2.65  
2.80  
3.02  
3.28  
3.59  
4.10  
55  
48  
65  
71  
Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled  
Water Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature)  
which may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if  
necessary.  
82  
102  
113  
119  
129  
142  
163  
PRE-START-UP  
IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,  
complete Start-Up Checklist for 30RA Liquid Chiller at  
end of this publication (page CL-1 to CL-8). The Checklist  
assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record of  
unit condition, application requirements, system informa-  
tion, and operation at initial start-up.  
START-UP AND OPERATION  
NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-8.  
Actual Start-Up Actual start-up should be done only  
under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic.  
Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks  
have been completed.  
1. Be sure all service valves are open.  
2. Using the Scrolling Marquee display, set leaving-fluid set  
point (CSP.1) [Set Point, COOL]. No cooling range ad-  
justment is necessary.  
3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler  
pump control).  
System Check  
1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid  
pumps, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to  
which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult manufacturer's  
instructions. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have  
been properly installed. If the unit If the unit has  
4. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to  
ENABLE position.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMPRESSOR OIL  
SIGHT GLASS  
Fig. 39 Compressor Connections and Oil Sight Glass Location  
5. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is func-  
tioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid tempera-  
ture agrees with leaving set point (CSP.1 or CSP.2), or if  
reset is used, with the control point (CTPT) [Run Status,  
VIEW].  
lower right of the compressor junction box for all other com-  
pressor models.  
Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do  
not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge  
pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power  
consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be  
sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler to  
prevent freezing. Damage caused by freezing is considered  
abuse and may void the Sterling warranty.  
6. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see  
that it remains well above 32 F (0° C), or the brine freez-  
ing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.  
7. Recheck compressor oil level (see Check Oil Charge  
section).  
Check Refrigerant Charge All 30RA units are  
shipped with a complete operating charge of R-22 and should  
be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after installa-  
tion. If there is no system pressure, admit nitrogen until a pres-  
sure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. After leaks  
are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.  
Operating Limitations  
TEMPERATURES (See Table 41 for 30RA Standard Tem-  
perature Limits)  
All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in.  
Schraeder connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refriger-  
ant charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If com-  
plete charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for  
the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is  
required, operate circuit at full load and use an accurate tem-  
perature sensor on the liquid line as it enters the TXV. Use the  
Temperatures mode on the Scrolling Marquee display to show  
the circuit saturated condensing temperature (SCT.A or  
SCT.B). Charging is most accurate at saturated discharge tem-  
peratures of 120 to 125 F (49 to 52 C). Block condenser airflow  
as required to reach this temperature range. Add refrigerant un-  
til the system subcooling (SCT.A or SCT.B minus liquid line  
temperature entering TXV) is approximately 15 to 17 F (–9.4  
to –8.3 C). Refrigerant VAPOR only may be added to a circuit  
Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid)  
temperature (LCWT) below 40 F (4.4 C) for the standard  
units, or below 15 F (–9.4 C) for units factory built for  
medium temperature brine.  
High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures  
(LCWT) — During start-up with cooler LCWT above approx-  
imately 60 F (16 C), the unit expansion valve will limit suction  
pressure to approximately 90 psig (620 kPa) to avoid overload-  
ing the compressor.  
Low Cooler LCWT — For standard units, the LCWT must be  
no lower than 40 F (4.4 C). If the unit is the factory-installed  
optional medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can  
go down to 15 F (–9.4 C).  
1
through the /4-in. suction Schraeder connection on the com-  
pressor. This connection is located in line and to the left of the  
compressor junction box for the SM110 compressors and to the  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 41 Temperature Limits for  
2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:  
Standard 30RA Units  
(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v  
(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v  
(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v  
UNIT SIZE 30RA  
010-030  
032-055  
Temperature  
F
C
F
C
Maximum deviation is 4 v.  
Maximum Ambient  
Temperature  
Minimum Ambient  
Temperature  
120  
45  
49  
120  
49  
3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:  
7
32  
0
4
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x  
239  
Maximum Cooler EWT*  
Maximum Cooler LWT  
Minimum Cooler LWT†  
95  
70  
40  
35  
21  
4.4  
95  
70  
40  
35  
21  
4.4  
= 1.7%  
LEGEND  
Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature  
Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature  
This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the  
maximum allowable of 2%.  
EWT  
LWT  
IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is  
more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company  
immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition  
is corrected.  
*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).  
Unit requires modification below this temperature.  
LOW-AMBIENT OPERATION — If operating temperatures  
below 45 F (7 C) for sizes 010-030 or below 32 F (0° C) for  
sizes 032-055 are expected, accessory Motormaster® V con-  
trol must be installed. Refer to separate installation instructions  
for operation using this accessory. Contact your Sterling repre-  
sentative for details.  
Control Circuit Power — Power for the control circuit is  
supplied from the main incoming power through a factory-  
installed control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models.  
Field wiring connections are made to either terminal block  
TB5 or TB6.  
OPERATION SEQUENCE  
Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] LCWT) for  
chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact  
your Sterling representative for applicable LCWT range for  
standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application.  
During unit off cycle, the control monitors the outdoor air  
temperature. If the ambient temperature drops below 40 F  
(4.4 C), cooler and hydronic system heaters (if either are facto-  
ry installed) are energized. If power is maintained to the chiller  
and the EMERGENCY ON/OFF switch is left in the OFF po-  
sition, these heaters are also energized.  
The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE  
CONTACT switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTACT  
position. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from  
the internal control or SCN network command or remote con-  
tact closure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leav-  
ing fluid set point. The first compressor starts 11/2 to 3 minutes  
after the call for cooling.  
VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS  
Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable  
supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.  
Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor  
where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.  
To determine percent voltage imbalance:  
max voltage deviation  
from avg voltage  
average voltage  
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x  
The lead circuit can be specifically designated on all models  
or selected based on compressor run hours and starts depend-  
ing on field configuration. The unit control will override this  
selection under certain starting conditions to properly maintain  
oil return to the compressors. In general, on dual compressor  
circuits, the control will most often start the A1 or B1 compres-  
sor first, especially after long off periods. The MBB controls  
fan stages to maintain the head pressure set point and will auto-  
matically adjust unit capacity as required to keep compressors  
from operating outside of the specified envelope. There are no  
pumpout or pumpdown sequences on these chillers.  
For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit con-  
trols to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load  
reduces. If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be  
unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature be-  
cause of imposed power limitations. Loading sequence for  
compressors is shown in Tables 6 and 7.  
The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference  
between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average  
across all 3 legs.  
Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.  
AB = 243 v  
BC = 236 v  
AC = 238 v  
1. Determine average voltage:  
243 + 236 + 238  
Averagevoltage =  
3
717  
=
3
= 239  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX A  
SCN Tables  
A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters)  
DESCRIPTION  
Control Mode  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
STAT  
FORCEABLE  
N
0 = Test  
1 = Local Off  
2 = SCN Off  
3 = Clock Off  
4 = Emergency Stop  
5 = Local On  
6 = SCN On  
7 = Clock On  
8 = Heat Enabled  
9 = Pump Delay  
Occupied  
SCN Chiller  
Low Sound Active  
Alarm State  
Active Demand Limit  
Override Modes in Effect  
Percent Total Capacity  
Requested Stage  
Active Set Point  
No/Yes  
Start/Stop  
No/Yes  
Normal/Alert/Alarm  
0 to 100  
No/Yes  
0 to 100  
0 to 99  
20 to 70  
20 to 70  
snnn.n  
OCC  
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
CHIL_S_S  
LSACTIVE  
ALM  
DEM_LIM  
MODE  
CAP_T  
STAGE  
SP  
CTRL_PNT  
EWT  
%
%
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
Enable  
minutes  
Control Point  
Entering Fluid Temp  
Leaving Fluid Temp  
Emergency Stop  
Minutes Left for Start  
PUMPS  
snnn.n  
Enable/Emstop  
00:00 to 15:00  
LWT  
EMSTOP  
MIN_LEFT  
Cooler Pump Relay 1  
Cooler Pump Relay 2  
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock  
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock  
Cooler Flow Switch  
Rotate Cooler Pumps Now  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Open/Close  
Open/Close  
Open/Close  
No/Yes  
COOLPMP1  
COOLPMP2  
PMP1_FBK  
PMP2_FBK  
COOLFLOW  
ROT_PUMP  
N
N
N
N
N
Heat/Cool Select  
Heat/Cool  
HC_SEL  
N
CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs)  
DESCRIPTION  
CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS  
Compressor A1 Relay  
Compressor A2 Relay  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
FORCEABLE  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
K_A1_RLY  
K_A2_RLY  
MLV_RLY  
N
N
N
CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS  
Compressor A1 Feedback  
Compressor A2 Feedback  
On/Off  
On/Off  
K_A1_FBK  
K_A2_FBK  
N
N
CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters)  
DESCRIPTION  
CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES  
Percent Total Capacity  
Percent Available Cap.  
Discharge Pressure  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
FORCEABLE  
0-100  
0-100  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
%
%
PSIG  
PSIG  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
F  
CAPA_T  
CAPA_A  
DP_A  
SP_A  
HSP_A  
TMP_SCTA  
TMP_SSTA  
TMP_RGTA  
SH_A  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Suction Pressure  
Calculated HP Setpoint A  
Saturated Condensing Tmp  
Saturated Suction Temp  
Compr Return Gas Temp  
Suction Superheat Temp  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs)  
DESCRIPTION  
CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS  
Compressor B1 Relay  
Compressor B2 Relay  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
FORCEABLE  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
K_B1_RLY  
K_B2_RLY  
MLV_RLY  
N
N
N
CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS  
Compressor B1 Feedback  
Compressor B2 Feedback  
On/Off  
On/Off  
K_B1_FBK  
K_B2_FBK  
N
N
CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters)  
DESCRIPTION  
CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES  
Percent Total Capacity  
Percent Available Cap.  
Discharge Pressure  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
FORCEABLE  
0-100  
0-100  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
%
%
PSIG  
PSIG  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
F  
CAPB_T  
CAPB_A  
DP_B  
SP_B  
HSP_B  
TMP_SCTB  
TMP_SSTB  
TMP_RGTB  
SH_B  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Suction Pressure  
Calculated HP Setpoint B  
Saturated Condensing Tmp  
Saturated Suction Temp  
Compr Return Gas Temp  
Suction Superheat Temp  
OPTIONS (Unit Parameters)  
DESCRIPTION  
FANS  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
FORCEABLE  
Fan 1 Relay  
Fan 2 Relay  
Cooler/Pump Heater  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Off/On  
FAN_1  
FAN_2  
COOL_HTR  
N
N
N
UNIT ANALOG VALUES  
Cooler Entering Fluid  
Cooler Leaving Fluid  
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
°F  
°F  
°F  
COOL_EWT  
COOL_LWT  
DUAL_LWT  
N
N
N
TEMPERATURE RESET  
4-20 mA Reset Signal  
Outside Air Temperature  
Space Temperature  
nn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
mA  
°F  
°F  
RST_MA  
OAT  
SPT  
N
Y
Y
DEMAND LIMIT  
4-20 mA Demand Signal  
Demand Limit Switch 1  
Demand Limit Switch 2  
SCN Loadshed Signal  
nn.n  
Off/On  
Off/On  
0 = Normal  
1 = Redline  
2 = Loadshed  
mA  
LMT_MA  
N
N
N
N
DMD_SW1  
DMD_SW2  
DL_STAT  
MISCELLANEOUS  
Heat Request  
Dual Setpoint Switch  
Cooler LWT Setpoint  
Ice Done  
Off/On  
Off/On  
snnn.n  
Off/On  
HEAT_REQ  
DUAL_IN  
LWT_SP  
N
N
N
N
°F  
ICE_DONE  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ALARMDEF (Alarm Definition Table)  
DESCRIPTION  
Alarm Routing Control  
Equipment Priority  
Comm Failure Retry Time  
Re-alarm Time  
VALUE  
00000000  
0 to 7  
1 to 240  
1 to 255  
XXXXXXXX  
DEFAULT  
00000000  
4
10  
30  
CHILLER  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
ALRM_CNT  
EQP_TYPE  
RETRY_TM  
RE-ALARM  
ALRM_NAM  
min  
min  
Alarm System Name  
BRODEFS (Broadcast POC Definition Table)  
DESCRIPTION  
SCN Time/Date Broadcast  
SCN OAT Broadcast  
Global Schedule Broadcast  
SCN Broadcast Acker  
Daylight Savings Start:  
Month  
Week  
Day  
Minutes to Add  
Daylight Savings Stop  
Month  
VALUE  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
DEFAULT  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
SCNBC  
OATBC  
GSBC  
SCNBCACK  
No  
No  
No  
No  
1 to 12  
1 to 5  
1 to 7  
4
1
7
60  
STARTM  
STARTW  
STARTD  
MINADD  
0 to 99  
min  
min  
1 to 12  
1 to 5  
1 to 7  
10  
5
7
STOPM  
STOPW  
STOPD  
MINSUB  
Week  
Day  
Minutes to Subtract  
0 to 99  
60  
DISPLAY (Marquee Display SETUP)  
DESCRIPTION  
Service Password  
Password Enable  
Metric Display  
VALUE  
nnnn  
Enable/Disable  
Off/On  
DEFAULT  
1111  
Enable  
Off  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
PASSWORD  
PASS_EBL  
DISPUNIT  
Language Selection  
0 = ENGLISH  
0
LANGUAGE  
1 = FRANCAIS  
2 = ESPANOL  
3 = PORTUGUES  
DUALCHIL (Dual Chiller Configuration Settings)  
DESCRIPTION  
LEAD/LAG  
VALUE  
DEFAULT  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
Lead/Lag Chiller Enable  
Master/Slave Select  
Slave Address  
Lead/Lag Balance Select  
Lead/Lag Balance Delta  
Lag Start Delay  
Enable/Dsable  
Master/Slave  
0 to 239  
0 = None  
40 to 400  
0 to 30  
Dsable  
Master  
2
0
168  
5
Yes  
LL_ENA  
MS_SEL  
SLV_ADDR  
LL_BAL  
LL_BAL_D  
LL_DELAY  
PARALLEL  
hours  
minutes  
Parallel Configuration  
Yes  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration)  
DESCRIPTION  
Cooler Fluid  
VALUE  
1 = Water  
2 = Med. Brine  
DEFAULT  
1
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
FLUIDTYP  
Minimum Load Vlv Select  
Return Gas Sensor Enable  
Motormaster Select  
Cooler Pump Control  
Cooler Pump 1 Enable  
Cooler Pump 2 Enable  
Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt  
Cooler Pump Select  
No/Yes  
Dsable/Enable  
No/Yes  
Off/On  
No/Yes  
Dsable/Enable  
No/Yes  
0 = Automatic  
1 = Pump 1  
2 = Pump 2  
No  
Dsable  
No  
Off  
No  
Dsable  
No  
0
MLV_FLG  
RGT_ENA  
MTR_TYPE  
CPC  
PMP1_ENA  
PMP2_ENA  
PUMP_PST  
PMP_SLCT  
Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly  
Pump Changeover Hours  
EMM Module Installed  
0 to 10  
10 to 2000  
No/Yes  
1
500  
No  
minutes  
hours  
PUMP_DLY  
PMP_DLTA  
EMM_BRD  
OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration)  
DESCRIPTION  
VALUE  
DEFAULT  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
Control Method  
0 = Switch  
0
CONTROL  
2 = Occupancy  
3 = SCN  
Loading Sequence Select  
Lead/Lag Circuit Select  
1 = Equal Loading  
2 = Staged Loading  
0 = Automatic  
1 = Circuit A Leads  
2 = Circuit B Leads  
1
0
SEQ_TYP  
LEAD_TYP  
Cooling Setpoint Select  
0 = Single  
0
CLSP_TYP  
1 = Dual, remote switch controlled  
2 = Dual SCN occupancy  
3 = 4-20 mA input  
Ramp Load Select  
Heat Cool Select  
High LCW Alert Limit  
Minutes off time  
Enable/Dsable  
Cool/Heat  
2 to 60  
Enable  
Cool  
60.0  
0
RAMP_EBL  
HEATCOOL  
LCW_LMT  
DELAY  
F  
min  
0 to 15  
Deadband Multiplier  
Ice Mode Enable  
Close Control Select  
Low Sound Mode Select  
1.0 to 4.0  
Enable/Dsable  
Enable/Dsable  
2.0  
Z_GAIN  
Dsable  
Dsable  
1
ICE_CNFG  
CLS_CTRL  
LS_MODE  
0 = Disabled  
1 = Fan only  
2 = Capacity/Fans  
Low Sound Start Time  
Low Sound End Time  
Low Sound Capacity Limit  
Enable Short Loop Gain  
00:00 to 23:59  
00:00 to 23:59  
0 to 100  
00:00  
00:00  
100  
LS_START  
LS_END  
LS_LIMIT  
SAGENABL  
%
Enable/Dsable  
Enable  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RESETCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit)  
DESCRIPTION  
COOLING RESET  
VALUE  
DEFAULT  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
Cooling Reset Type  
0 = No Reset  
0
CRST_TYP  
1 = 4-20 mA input  
2 = External temp OAT  
3 = Return Fluid  
4 = External temp - SPT  
4-20 MA RESET  
4-20 Degrees Reset  
30 to 30  
0.0  
F  
420_DEG  
REMOTE RESET  
Remote No Reset Temp  
Remote Full Reset Temp  
Remote Degrees Reset  
0 to 125  
0 to 125  
30 to 30  
125.0  
0.0  
0.0  
°F  
°F  
F  
REM_NO  
REM_FULL  
REM_DEG  
RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET  
Return No Reset Temp  
Return Full Reset Temp  
Return Degrees Reset  
0 to 125  
0 to 125  
30 to 30  
10.0  
0.0  
0.0  
F  
F  
F  
RTN_NO  
RTN_FULL  
RTN_DEG  
DEMAND LIMIT  
Demand Limit Select  
0 = None  
0
DMD_CTRL  
1 = External switch input  
2 = 4-20 mA input  
3 = Loadshed  
Demand Limit at 20 mA  
Loadshed Group Number  
Loadshed Demand Delta  
Maximum Loadshed Time  
Demand Limit Switch 1  
Demand Limit Switch 2  
0 to 100  
0 to 99  
0 to 60  
0 to 120  
0 to 100  
0 to 100  
100  
0
0
60  
80  
50  
%
DMT20MA  
SHED_NUM  
SHED_DEL  
SHED_TIM  
DLSWSP1  
DLSWSP2  
%
minutes  
%
%
SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Setup)  
DESCRIPTION  
Schedule Number  
Override Time Limit  
Timed Override Hours  
Timed Override  
VALUE  
0 to 99  
0 to 4  
0 to 4  
No/Yes  
DEFAULT  
1
0
0
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
SCHEDNUM  
OTL  
OVR_EXT  
TIMEOVER  
hours  
hours  
No  
SETPOINT  
DESCRIPTION  
COOLING  
VALUE  
DEFAULT  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
Cooling Setpoint 1  
Cooling Setpoint 2  
ICE Setpoint  
20 to 70  
20 to 70  
20 to 32  
44.0  
44.0  
32.0  
°F  
°F  
°F  
CSP1  
CSP2  
CSP3  
RAMP LOADING  
Cooling Ramp Loading  
0.2 to 2.0  
1.0  
CRAMP  
Brine Freeze Point  
20 to 34  
34.0  
°F  
BRN_FRZ  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNIT  
DESCRIPTION  
Compressor A1 Size  
VALUE  
8 to 15  
DEFAULT  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
SIZE_A1  
60 Hz: 010-10; 015-15;  
018-9; 022-9; 025-13;  
030-15; 035-9; 040-13;  
045-10; 050-13; 055-15  
50 Hz: 010-11; 015-7;  
018-9; 022-11; 025-13;  
032-8; 035-13; 042-11;  
045-13  
Compressor A2 Size  
0 to 15  
SIZE_A2  
60 Hz: 018-9; 022-13;  
025-13; 030-15; 035-13;  
040-13;  
045-13; 050-13; 055-15  
50 Hz: 015-7; 018-9; 022-  
11; 025-13; 032-11; 035-  
13; 042-11; 045-13  
Compressor B1 Size  
Compressor B2 Size  
0 to 15  
0 to 15  
SIZE_B1  
SIZE_B2  
60 Hz: 035-15; 040-15;  
045-10; 050-13; 055-15  
50 Hz: 032-13; 035-13;  
042-11; 045-13  
60 Hz: 045-13; 050-13;  
055-15  
50 Hz: 042-11; 045-13  
Suction Superheat Setpt  
Refrigerant  
Fan Staging Select  
10 to 40  
1 = R22  
1 = 1 Fan  
2 = 2 Fans  
3 = 3 Fans  
4 = 4 Fans  
15  
1
SH_SP  
REFRIG_T  
FAN_TYPE  
1 = One Fan (010-018)  
2 = Two Fans (022-030)  
3 = Three Fans (032-040)  
4 = Four Fans (042-055)  
MAINTENANCE  
ALARMS: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
VALUE  
POINT NAME  
ALARM01C  
ALARM02C  
ALARM03C  
ALARM04C  
ALARM05C  
ALARM06C  
ALARM07C  
ALARM08C  
ALARM09C  
ALARM10C  
ALARM11C  
ALARM12C  
ALARM13C  
ALARM14C  
ALARM15C  
ALARM16C  
ALARM17C  
ALARM18C  
ALARM19C  
ALARM20C  
ALARM21C  
ALARM22C  
ALARM23C  
ALARM24C  
ALARM25C  
Active Alarm #1  
Active Alarm #2  
Active Alarm #3  
Active Alarm #4  
Active Alarm #5  
Active Alarm #6  
Active Alarm #7  
Active Alarm #8  
Active Alarm #9  
Active Alarm #10  
Active Alarm #11  
Active Alarm #12  
Active Alarm #13  
Active Alarm #14  
Active Alarm #15  
Active Alarm #16  
Active Alarm #17  
Active Alarm #18  
Active Alarm #19  
Active Alarm #20  
Active Alarm #21  
Active Alarm #22  
Active Alarm #23  
Active Alarm #24  
Active Alarm #25  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
Axxx or Txxx  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CURRMODS: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
FSM controlling Chiller  
WSM controlling Chiller  
Master/Slave control  
Ramp Load Limited  
Timed Override in effect  
Low Cooler Suction TempA  
Low Cooler Suction TempB  
Slow Change Override  
Minimum OFF time active  
Dual Setpoint  
VALUE  
POINT NAME  
MODE_1  
MODE_2  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
MODE_3  
MODE_5  
MODE_6  
MODE_7  
MODE_8  
MODE_9  
MODE_10  
MODE_13  
MODE_14  
MODE_15  
MODE_16  
MODE_17  
MODE_18  
MODE_19  
MODE_20  
MODE_21  
MODE_22  
MODE_23  
MODE_24  
MODE_25  
MODE_26  
Temperature Reset  
Demand/Sound Limited  
Cooler Freeze Protection  
Low Temperature Cooling  
High Temperature Cooling  
Making ICE  
Storing ICE  
High SCT Circuit A  
High SCT Circuit B  
Minimum Comp. On Time  
Pump Off Delay Time  
Low Sound Mode  
Short Loop Override  
DUALCHIL: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Dual Chiller Link Good?  
Master Chiller Role  
VALUE  
Yes/No  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
DC_LINK  
Stand Alone,  
Lead Chiller,  
Lag Chiller  
Stand Alone,  
Lead Chiller,  
Lag Chiller  
MC_ROLE  
SC_ROLE  
Slave Chiller Role  
Lead Chiller Ctrl Point  
Lag Chiller Ctrl Point  
Control Point  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
0-100  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
%
LEAD_CP  
LAG_CP  
CTRL_PNT  
COOLEWTS  
COOLLWTS  
COOL_EWT  
COOL_LWT  
DUAL_LWT  
CAP_A  
CAP_A_S  
LAGDELAY  
SMZ  
SMZSLAVE  
LEADSMZC  
LAG_SMZC  
LAG_OFF  
DCLDCAPL  
DCLGCAPL  
Cool EnteringFluid-Slave  
Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave  
Cooler Entering Fluid  
Cooler Leaving Fluid  
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid  
Percent Avail.Capacity  
Percent Avail.Cap.Slave  
Lag Start Delay Time  
Load/Unload Factor  
Load/Unload Factor-Slave  
Lead SMZ Clear Commanded  
Lag- SMZ Clear Commanded  
Lag Commanded Off?  
Dual Chill Lead CapLimit  
Dual Chill Lag CapLimit  
0-100  
%
hh:mm  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
0-100  
%
%
0-100  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEARNFNS: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Fan 1 Delta SCT point 1  
Fan 1 Delta SCT point 2  
Fan 1 Delta SCT point 3  
Fan 1 Delta SCT point 4  
Fan 1 Delta SCT point 5  
Fan 2 Delta SCT point 1  
Fan 2 Delta SCT point 2  
Fan 2 Delta SCT point 3  
Fan 2 Delta SCT point 4  
Fan 2 Delta SCT point 5  
SCT Delta for Comp A1  
SCT Delta for Comp A2  
SCT Delta for Comp B1  
SCT Delta for Comp B2  
SAGP for Compressor A1  
SAGM for Compressor A1  
SAGP for Compressor A2  
SAGM for Compressor A2  
SAGP for Compressor B1  
SAGM for Compressor B1  
SAGP for Compressor B2  
SAGM for Compressor B2  
VALUE  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
nn.n  
UNITS  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
POINT NAME  
F1DLTA1  
F1DLTA2  
F1DLTA3  
F1DLTA4  
F1DLTA5  
F2DLTA1  
F2DLTA2  
F2DLTA3  
F2DLTA4  
F2DLTA5  
A1SCTDT  
A2SCTDT  
B1SCTDT  
B2SCTDT  
SAGA1P  
SAGA1M  
SAGA2P  
SAGA2M  
SAGB1P  
SAGB1M  
SAGB2P  
SAGB2M  
LOADFACT: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
CAPACITY CONTROL  
Load/Unload Factor  
Control Point  
Entering Fluid Temp  
Leaving Fluid Temp  
VALUE  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
SMZ  
CTRL_PNT  
EWT  
°F  
°F  
°F  
LWT  
Ramp Load Limited  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
MODE_5  
MODE_9  
MODE_16  
MODE_17  
MODE_18  
MODE_23  
Slow Change Override  
Cooler Freeze Protection  
Low Temperature Cooling  
High Temperature Cooling  
Minimum Comp. On Time  
OCCUPANCY SUPERVISORY (OCCDEFM): Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Current Mode (1=Occup.)  
Current Occup. Period #  
Timed-Override in Effect  
Time-Override Duration  
Current Occupied Time  
Current Unoccupied Time  
Next Occupied Day  
VALUE  
0/1  
0-8  
Yes/No  
0-4 hours  
hh:mm  
hh:mm  
POINT NAME  
MODE  
PER-NO  
OVERLAST  
OVR_HRS  
STRTTIME  
ENDTIME  
NXTOCDAY  
NXTOCTIM  
NXTUNDAY  
NXTUNTIM  
PRVUNDAY  
PRVUNTIM  
Next Occupied Time  
hh:mm  
hh:mm  
hh:mm  
Next Unoccupied Day  
Next Unoccupied Time  
Previous Unoccupied Day  
Previous Unoccupied Time  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM-COIL: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter  
Coil Service Countdown  
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done  
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date  
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date  
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date  
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date  
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date  
VALUE  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
UNITS  
hours  
hours  
POINT NAME  
SI_COIL  
CL_CDOWN  
CL_MAINT  
COIL_PM0  
COIL_PM1  
COIL_PM2  
COIL_PM3  
COIL_PM4  
Yes/No  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
PM-PUMP: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Pump Service Interval  
VALUE  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
Yes/No  
nnnnnn  
Yes/No  
UNITS  
hours  
hours  
POINT NAME  
SI_PUMPS  
P1_CDOWN  
P1_MAINT  
P2_CDOWN  
P2_MAINT  
PMP1_PM0  
PMP1_PM1  
PMP1_PM2  
PMP1_PM3  
PMP1_PM4  
PMP2_PM0  
PMP2_PM1  
PMP2_PM2  
PMP2_PM3  
PMP2_PM4  
Pump 1 Service Countdown  
Pump 1 Maintenance Done  
Pump 2 Service Countdown  
Pump 2 Maintenance Done  
Pump 1 Maintenance Date  
Pump 1 Maintenance Date  
Pump 1 Maintenance Date  
Pump 1 Maintenance Date  
Pump 1 Maintenance Date  
Pump 2 Maintenance Date  
Pump 2 Maintenance Date  
Pump 2 Maintenance Date  
Pump 2 Maintenance Date  
Pump 2 Maintenance Date  
hours  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
PM-STRN: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Strainer Srvc Interval  
Strainer Srvc Countdown  
Strainer Maint. Done  
Strainer Maint. Date  
Strainer Maint. Date  
Strainer Maint. Date  
Strainer Maint. Date  
Strainer Maint. Date  
VALUE  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
UNITS  
hours  
hours  
POINT NAME  
SI_STRNR  
ST_CDOWN  
ST_MAINT  
STRN_PM0  
STRN_PM1  
STRN_PM2  
STRN_PM3  
STRN_PM4  
Yes/No  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
mm/dd/yy hh:mm  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RUNTEST: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Percent Total Capacity  
Percent Available Cap.  
Discharge Pressure  
VALUE  
nnn  
nnn  
UNITS  
%
%
psig  
psig  
°F  
°F  
°F  
POINT NAME  
CAPA_T  
CAPA_A  
DP_A  
SP_A  
HSP_A  
TMP_SCTA  
TMP_SSTA  
TMP_RGTA  
SH_A  
K_A1_RLY  
K_A2_RLY  
MLV_RLY  
K_A1_FBK  
K_A2_FBK  
CAPB_T  
CAPB_A  
DP_B  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
nnn  
Suction Pressure  
Calculated HP Setpoint A  
Saturated Condensing Tmp  
Saturated Suction Temp  
Compr Return Gas Temp  
Suction Superheat Temp  
Compressor A1 Relay  
Compressor A2 Relay  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
Compressor A1 Feedback  
Compressor A2 Feedback  
Percent Total Capacity  
Percent Available Cap.  
Discharge Pressure  
°F  
^F  
%
%
psig  
psig  
°F  
°F  
°F  
°F  
^F  
nnn  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Suction Pressure  
SP_B  
HSP_B  
Calculated HP Setpoint B  
Saturated Condensing Tmp  
Saturated Suction Temp  
Compr Return Gas Temp  
Suction Superheat Temp  
Compressor B1 Relay  
Compressor B2 Relay  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
TMP_SCTB  
TMP_SSTB  
TMP_RGTB  
SH_B  
K_B1_RLY  
K_B2_RLY  
MLV_RLY  
Compressor B1 Feedback  
Compressor B2 Feedback  
Fan 1 Relay  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
K_B1_FBK  
K_B2_FBK  
FAN_1  
Fan 2 Relay  
FAN_2  
Outside Air Temperature  
Space Temperature  
Cooler Pump Relay 1  
Cooler Pump Relay 2  
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock  
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock  
Cooler Entering Fluid  
Cooler Leaving Fluid  
Compressor A1 Size  
Compressor A2 Size  
Compressor B1 Size  
Compressor B2 Size  
Cooler Flow Switch  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
°F  
°F  
OAT  
SPT  
On/Off  
On/Off  
Open/Closed  
Open/Closed  
nnn.n  
COOLPMP1  
COOLPMP2  
PMP1_FBK  
PMP2_FBK  
COOL_EWT  
COOL_LWT  
SIZE_A1  
SIZE_A2  
SIZE_B1  
SIZE_B2  
COOLFLOW  
°F  
°F  
tons  
tons  
tons  
tons  
nnn.n  
nnn  
nnn  
nnn  
nnn  
On/Off  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STRTHOUR: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Machine Operating Hours  
Machine Starts  
VALUE  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
UNITS  
hours  
POINT NAME  
HR_MACH  
CY_MACH  
Circuit A Run Hours  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
hours  
hours  
hours  
hours  
hours  
hours  
HR_CIRA  
HR_A1  
HR_A2  
HR_CIRB  
HR_B1  
HR_B2  
Compressor A1 Run Hours  
Compressor A2 Run Hours  
Circuit B Run Hours  
Compressor B1 Run Hours  
Compressor B2 Run Hours  
Circuit A Starts  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
CY_CIRA  
CY_A1  
CY_A2  
CY_CIRB  
CY_B1  
CY_B2  
Compressor A1 Starts  
Compressor A2 Starts  
Circuit B Starts  
Compressor B1 Starts  
Compressor B2 Starts  
PUMP HOURS  
Pump 1 Run Hours  
Pump 2 Run Hours  
nnnnnn  
nnnnnn  
hours  
hours  
HR_PUMP1  
HR_PUMP2  
TESTMODE: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
Service Test Mode  
Compressor A1 Relay  
Compressor A2 Relay  
Compressor B1 Relay  
Compressor B2 Relay  
Fan 1 Relay  
VALUE  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
NET_CTRL  
S_A1_RLY  
S_A2_RLY  
S_B1_RLY  
S_B2_RLY  
S_FAN_1  
S_FAN_2  
S_CLPMP1  
S_CLPMP2  
S_MLV  
Fan 2 Relay  
Cooler Pump Relay 1  
Cooler Pump Relay 2  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
Remote Alarm Relay  
S_ALM  
VERSIONS: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
MBB  
EMM  
MARQUEE  
NAVIGATOR  
VERSION  
VALUE  
nn-nn  
nn-nn  
nn-nn  
nn-nn  
CESR131279-  
CESR131174-  
CESR131171-  
CESR130227-  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WSMDEFME: Maintenance Display  
DESCRIPTION  
WSM Active?  
VALUE  
Yes  
UNITS  
POINT NAME  
WSMSTAT  
Chilled water temp  
Equipment status  
snn.n  
On  
°F  
CHWTEMP  
CHLRST  
Commanded state  
Enable  
Dsable  
None  
CHLRENA  
CHW setpoint reset value  
Current CHW setpoint  
nn.n  
snn.n  
^F  
°F  
CHWRVAL  
CHWSTPT  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX B  
FACTORY SETTINGS FOR COMPRESSOR, FAN, PUMP,  
AND MANUAL STARTERS  
MANUAL STARTER  
(CWP1, CWP2) SETTINGS  
FOR PUMP OPTIONS  
OVERLOAD  
RELAY (CA1)  
SETTING FOR  
OVERLOAD  
RELAY (CA2)  
SETTING FOR  
MANUAL  
STARTER  
MANUAL  
STARTER  
MANUAL  
STARTER  
SETTING FOR  
CHC (Heaters)  
UNIT  
SIZE  
30RA  
VOLTAGE  
V-PH-Hz  
VOLTAGE  
SERIES  
SETTING FOR  
SETTING FOR  
(Model Number Position 9)  
COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR  
FANS FC-HS/LS FANS FC-A1/A2  
A1  
A2  
A/F B/G C/H D/J E/K  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
15.5  
24.2  
37.1  
41.2  
19.2  
40.9  
23.8  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
31.1  
17.2  
13.6  
21  
31.9  
35.4  
16.9  
33.7  
18.7  
14.6  
22.7  
35.3  
39.2  
17.5  
40.9  
23.8  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
3.6  
5.5  
9.1  
10.1  
4.6  
7.6  
4.6  
3.6  
5.5  
9.1  
10.1  
4.6  
7.6  
4.6  
3.6  
5.5  
9.1  
10.1  
4.6  
7.6  
4.6  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
1.9  
2.9  
4.8  
5.3  
2.8  
3.4  
2.0  
1.9  
2.9  
4.8  
5.3  
2.8  
3.4  
2.0  
1.9  
2.9  
4.8  
5.3  
2.8  
3.4  
2.0  
1.9  
2.9  
4.8  
5.3  
2.8  
3.4  
2.0  
1.9  
2.9  
4.8  
5.3  
2.8  
3.4  
2.0  
1.9  
2.9  
4.8  
5.3  
2.8  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
3.6  
5.4  
8.9  
9.8  
4.4  
6.1  
3.7  
3.6  
5.4  
8.9  
9.8  
4.4  
6.1  
3.7  
3.6  
5.4  
8.9  
9.8  
4.4  
6.1  
3.7  
3.6  
5.4  
8.9  
9.8  
4.4  
6.1  
3.7  
3.6  
5.4  
8.9  
9.8  
4.4  
6.1  
3.7  
3.6  
5.4  
8.9  
9.8  
4.4  
010  
015  
018  
022  
31.1  
17.2  
13.6  
21  
31.9  
35.4  
16.9  
33.7  
18.7  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
4.6  
3.7  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
4.6  
3.7  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
49  
24.2  
40.9  
23.8  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
49  
49  
025  
030  
24.2  
49.9  
29  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
24.2  
49.9  
29  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FACTORY SETTINGS FOR COMPRESSOR, FAN, PUMP,  
AND MANUAL STARTERS (cont)  
MANUAL STARTER  
SETTINGS FOR  
PUMP OPTIONS  
(Model Number  
Position 9)  
OVERLOAD  
OVERLOAD  
OVERLOAD  
OVERLOAD  
MANUAL MANUAL  
STARTER STARTER  
SETTING SETTING  
MANUAL  
STARTER  
FOR FANS  
FC-HS/LS  
UNIT  
SIZE  
30RA  
RELAY (CA1) RELAY (CA2) RELAY (CB1) RELAY (CB2)  
SETTING FOR SETTING FOR SETTING FOR SETTING FOR  
COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR  
VOLTAGE  
V-PH-Hz  
VOLTAGE  
SERIES  
FOR  
FOR CHC  
A1  
A2  
B1  
B2  
FC-A1/A2 (Heaters)  
A/F B/G C/H D/J E/K  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
230-3-50  
380/415-3-50  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
575-3-60  
380-3-60  
230-3-60  
208/230-3-60  
460-3-60  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-800  
-900  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
-100  
-200  
-400  
-500  
-600  
31.4  
17.4  
14.6  
22.7  
35.3  
39.2  
17.5  
49.9  
29  
40.9  
23.8  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
49.9  
29  
7.6  
4.6  
3.6  
5.5  
9.1  
10.1  
4.6  
7.6  
4.6  
3.6  
5.5  
9.1  
10.1  
4.6  
4.6  
3.7  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
4.6  
3.7  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
4.6  
3.7  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
4.6  
3.7  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
2.3  
3.5  
5.8  
7.0  
2.9  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
1.8  
1.8  
2.5  
2.5  
1.8  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
4.8  
2.9  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
2.5  
3.7  
6.2  
7.0  
3.1  
6.1 10.4  
3.7 6.4  
3.6 6.0  
5.4 9.1  
8.9 15.1  
9.8 16.7  
4.4 7.6  
6.1 10.4  
3.7 6.4  
3.6 6.0  
5.4 9.1  
8.9 15.1  
9.8 16.7  
4.4 7.6  
6.1 10.4  
3.7 6.4  
3.6 6.0  
5.4 9.1  
8.9 15.1  
9.8 16.7  
4.4 7.6  
6.1 10.4  
3.7 6.4  
3.6 6.0  
5.4 9.1  
8.9 15.1  
9.8 16.7  
4.4 7.6  
3.6 6.0  
5.4 9.1  
8.9 15.1  
9.8 16.7  
4.4 7.6  
032  
035  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
49.9  
29  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
40.9  
23.8  
15.5  
24.2  
37.1  
41.2  
19.2  
49.9  
29  
49  
24.2  
49.9  
29  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
040  
042  
49  
49  
24.2  
40.9  
23.8  
15.5  
24.2  
37.1  
41.2  
19.2  
49.9  
29  
24.2  
40.9  
23.8  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
40.9  
23.8  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
49  
49  
045  
24.2  
49.9  
29  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
24.2  
49.9  
29  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
19.9  
31.7  
44  
050  
055  
49  
49  
49  
49  
24.2  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
24.2  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
24.2  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
24.2  
22.7  
36.1  
52.6  
58.4  
28.6  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX C  
communication bus. The Sterlco DataLink control is an inter-  
Building Interface The 30RAN chiller can be inter-  
faced with multi-vendor control systems through 3 levels of  
inter-operability using BAClink, DataPort™, or DataLink™  
controls. BAClink controls function as a gateway between a  
SCN and a BACnet™ system to facilitate the passing of data  
from the SCN to BACnet. The Sterlco DataPort control is an  
interface device that allows other HVAC control systems to  
“read only” values in system elements connected to a SCN  
face device that allows other HVAC control systems to read  
and change (“read/write”) values in system elements connected  
to a SCN bus. Both DataPort and DataLink controls request  
data from a specified SCN system element and translate this  
data into ASCII characters off network. Information from the  
30RAN chiller control to support interface are listed in the  
following tables.  
DataPort, DataLink, BAClink Object Definition  
SCN TABLE  
DESCRIPTION  
STATUS  
UNITS  
POINT  
DataPort  
DataLink  
BAClink  
NAME  
GENERAL PARAMETERS  
Control Mode  
(Modes 0-9)  
No/Yes  
STAT  
OCC  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
NA  
RO  
RW  
NA  
RO  
NA  
NA  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RW  
NA  
Occupied  
SCN Chiller  
Low Sound Active  
Alarm State  
Start/Stop  
CHIL_S_S  
LSACTIVE  
ALM  
No/Yes  
Normal/Alert/Alarm  
0 to 100  
Active Demand Limit  
Override Modes In Effect  
Percent Total Capacity  
Requested Stage  
Active Setpoint  
%
%
DEM_LIM  
MODE  
No/Yes  
0 to 100  
CAP_T  
STAGE  
SP  
0 to 99  
20 to 70 (28.8 to 21.1)  
20 to 70 (28.8 to 21.1)  
snnn.n  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
Control Point  
CTRL_PNT  
EWT  
Entering Fluid Temp  
Leaving Fluid Temp  
Emergency Stop  
Minutes Left for Start  
PUMPS  
A_UNIT  
snnn.n  
Enable/Emstop  
00:00 to 15:00  
LWT  
EMSTOP  
MIN_LEFT  
Minutes  
Cooler Pump Relay 1  
Cooler Pump Relay 2  
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock  
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock  
Cooler Flow Switch  
Lead Pump  
Off/On  
Off/On  
COOLPMP1  
COOLPMP2  
PMP1_FBK  
PMP2_FBK  
COOLFLOW  
LEADPUMP  
ROT_PUMP  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Open/Close  
Open/Close  
Off/On  
0, 1, 2  
No/Yes  
Rotate Cooler Pumps Now  
Heat/Cool Select  
Heat/Cool  
HC_SEL  
RO  
RO  
NA  
CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS  
Compressor A1 Relay  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Off/On  
K_A1_RLY  
K_A2_RLY  
MLV_RLY  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
Compressor A2 Relay  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
CIRCADIO  
CIRCA_AN  
CIRCBDIO  
CIRCB_AN  
CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS  
Compressor A1 Feedback  
Compressor A2 Feedback  
Off/On  
Off/On  
K_A1_FBK  
K_A2_FBK  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
NA  
CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES  
Percent Total Capacity  
Percent Available Cap.  
Discharge Pressure  
0 to 100  
0 to 100  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
%
CAPA_T  
CAPA_A  
DP_A  
SP_A  
HSP_A  
TMP_SCTA  
TMP_SSTA  
TMP_RGTA  
SH_A  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
RO  
RO  
NA  
RO  
%
PSIG (KPA)  
PSIG (KPA)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
dF (dC)  
Suction Pressure  
Calculated HP Setpoint A  
Saturated Condensing Tmp  
Saturated Suction Temp  
Compr Return Gas Temp  
Suction Superheat Temp  
CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS  
Compressor B1 Relay  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Off/On  
K_B1_RLY  
K_B2_RLY  
MLV_RLY  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
Compressor B2 Relay  
Minimum Load Valve Relay  
CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS  
Compressor B1 Feedback  
Compressor B2 Feedback  
Off/On  
Off/On  
K_B1_FBK  
K_B2_FBK  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
NA  
CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES  
Percent Total Capacity  
Percent Available Cap.  
Discharge Pressure  
0 to 100  
0 to 100  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
nnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
%
%
CAPB_T  
CAPB_A  
DP_B  
SP_B  
HSP_B  
TMP_SCTB  
TMP_SSTB  
TMP_RGTB  
SH_B  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
RO  
RO  
NA  
RO  
PSIG (KPA)  
PSIG (KPA)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
dF (dC)  
Suction Pressure  
Calculated HP Setpoint B  
Saturated Condensing Tmp  
Saturated Suction Temp  
Compr Return Gas Temp  
Suction Superheat Temp  
NOTE: In order to write to any point with DataLink or BAClink con-  
trols, the machine must be configured for SCN control. CTRL  
Control Method (Configuration mode, sub-mode OPT2) must be set  
to 3 = SCN Control.  
LEGEND  
NA Not Available  
RO Read Only  
RW Read/Write  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DataPort, DataLink, BAClink Object Definition (cont)  
SCN TABLE  
DESCRIPTION  
STATUS  
UNITS  
POINT  
DataPort  
DataLink  
BAClink  
NAME  
FANS  
Fan 1 Relay  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Off/On  
FAN_1  
FAN_2  
COOL_HTR  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
Fan 2 Relay  
Cooler/Pump Heater  
UNIT ANALOG VALUES  
Cooler Entering Fluid  
Cooler Leaving Fluid  
Lead/Lag Fluid  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
COOL_EWT  
COOL_LWT  
DUAL_LWT  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
TEMPERTURE RESET  
4-20 mA Reset Signal  
Outside Air Temperature  
Space Temperature  
nn.n  
snnn.n  
snnn.n  
ma  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
RST_MA  
OAT  
SPT  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RW  
RO  
NA  
NA  
OPTIONS  
DEMAND LIMIT  
4-20 mA Demand Signal  
Demand Limit Switch 1  
Demand Limit Switch 2  
SCN Loadshed Signal  
nn.n  
ma  
LMT_MA  
DMD_SW1  
DMD_SW2  
DL_STAT  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
NA  
RO  
Off/On  
Off/On  
0, 1, 2  
MISCELLANEOUS  
Heat Request  
Dual Setpoint Switch  
Cooler LWT Setpoint  
Ice Done  
Off/On  
Off/On  
snnn.n  
Off/On  
HEAT_REQ  
DUAL_IN  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
°F (°C)  
LWT_SP  
ICE_DONE  
COOLING  
Cooling Setpoint 1  
Cooling Setpoint 2  
Ice Setpoint  
20 to 70 (28.8 to 21.1)  
20 to 70 (28.8 to 21.1)  
20 to 32 (28.8 to 0.0)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
°F (°C)  
CSP1  
CSP2  
CSP3  
NA  
NA  
NA  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
NA  
NA  
SETPOINT  
RAMP LOADING  
Cooling Ramp Loading  
0.2 to 2.0 (0.1 to 1.1)  
dF (dC)  
CRAMP  
NA  
NA  
RW  
RW  
NA  
NA  
Brine Freeze Point  
20 to 34 (28.8 to 1.1)  
°F (°C)  
BRN_FRZ  
Timed Override Hours  
Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
0
Hours  
OVR-EXT  
DOW1  
OCCTOD1  
UNOCTOD1  
DOW2  
OCCTOD2  
UNOCTOD2  
DOW3  
OCCTOD3  
UNOCTOD3  
DOW4  
OCCTOD4  
UNOCTOD4  
DOW5  
OCCTOD5  
UNOCTOD5  
DOW6  
OCCTOD6  
UNOCTOD6  
DOW7  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
00000000  
00:00  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 2 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 3 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 4 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
OCCPC01S  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 6 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 7 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
OCCTOD7  
UNOCTOD7  
DOW8  
OCCTOD8  
UNOCTOD8  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
Period 8 DOW (MTWTFSSH)  
Occupied Time  
00000000  
00:00  
Unoccupied Time  
00:00  
LEGEND  
NOTE: In order to write to any point with DataLink or BAClink con-  
trols, the machine must be configured for SCN control. CTRL  
Control Method (Configuration mode, sub-mode OPT2) must be set  
to 3 = SCN Control.  
NA Not Available  
RO Read Only  
RW Read/Write  
Copyright 2003 Sterling  
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.  
PC 903 Catalog No. 533-00047 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RA-2T Pg 92 1-03 Replaces: 30RA-1T  
Book 2  
Tab 5c  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RA LIQUID CHILLER  
(Remove and use for Job File)  
I. Project Information  
JOB NAME ______________________________________________________________________________  
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________________________________  
CITY ____________________________________________ STATE _______________ ZIP______________  
INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________  
SALES OFFICE ___________________________________________________________________________  
START-UP PERFORMED BY ________________________________________________________________  
Design Information  
CAPACITY  
CEAT  
EWT  
LWT  
FLUID TYPE  
FLOW RATE  
P.D.  
UNIT MODEL ______________________________ SERIAL ________________________________  
II. Preliminary Equipment Check  
IS THERE ANY PHYSICAL DAMAGE?  
YES  
NO  
DESCRIPTION ____________________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________________________________  
1. UNIT IS INSTALLED LEVEL AS PER THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.  
2. POWER SUPPLY AGREES WITH THE UNIT NAMEPLATE.  
3. ELECTRICAL POWER WIRING IS INSTALLED PROPERLY.  
4. UNIT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
5. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION HAS BEEN SIZED AND INSTALLED PROPERLY.  
6. ALL TERMINALS ARE TIGHT.  
7. ALL PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE TIGHT.  
8. ALL CABLES AND THERMISTORS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED FOR CROSSED WIRES.  
9. ALL THERMISTORS ARE FULLY INSERTED INTO WELLS.  
Chilled Water System Check  
1. ALL CHILLED WATER VALVES ARE OPEN.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
2. ALL PIPING IS CONNECTED PROPERLY.  
3. ALL AIR HAS BEEN PURGED FROM THE SYSTEM.  
4. CHILLED WATER PUMP IS OPERATING WITH THE CORRECT ROTATION.  
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.  
Book  
Tab  
2
PC 903  
Catalog No. 533-00047  
Printed in U.S.A.  
Form 30RA-2T  
Pg CL-1  
1-03  
Replaces: 30RA-1T  
5c  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER INTERLOCKED WITH CHILLER.  
6. CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH IS OPERATIONAL.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
7. WATER LOOP VOLUME GREATER THAN MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS. (See Table 40).  
8. PROPER LOOP FREEZE PROTECTION PROVIDED TO _____ °F (°C).  
ANTIFREEZE TYPE _____________________ CONCENTRATION __________%.  
IF OUTDOOR AMBIENT IS BELOW 32 F (0° C) THEN ITEMS 9-11 HAVE TO BE  
COMPLETED TO PROVIDE COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION TO 20 F (29 C). (REFER  
TO WINTER SHUTDOWN FOR PROPER COOLER WINTERIZATION PROCEDURE.)  
9. OUTDOOR PIPING WRAPPED WITH ELECTRIC HEATER TAPE,  
INSULATED AND OPERATIONAL.  
YES  
NO  
10. COOLER HEATERS INSTALLED AND OPERATIONAL.  
11. CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROLLED BY CHILLER.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
III. Unit Start-Up  
1. COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
2. VERIFY COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE IS 10-14 FT-LB. (13.5-18.9 N-M).  
3. LEAK CHECK UNIT. LOCATE, REPAIR AND REPORT ANY REFRIGERANT LEAKS.  
4. VOLTAGE IS WITHIN UNIT NAMEPLATE RANGE.  
5. CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONNECTION SET FOR PROPER VOLTAGE.  
6. CONTROL TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE =  
7. CHECK VOLTAGE IMBALANCE:  
AVERAGE VOLTAGE =  
A-B  
A-C  
B-C  
(A-B + A-C + B-C)/3  
MAXIMUM DEVIATION FROM AVERAGE VOLTAGE =  
VOLTAGE IMBALANCE = ____________% (MAX. DEVIATION/AVERAGE VOLTAGE) X 100  
VOLTAGE IMBALANCE LESS THAN 2%.  
(DO NOT START CHILLER IF VOLTAGE IMBALANCE IS GREATER THAN 2%.  
CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY FOR ASSISTANCE.)  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
8. VERIFY COOLER FLOW RATE.  
PRESSURE ENTERING COOLER  
PRESSURE LEAVING COOLER  
COOLER PRESSURE DROP  
Psig X 2.31 ft./psi =  
________ psig (kPa)  
________ psig (kPa)  
________ psig (kPa)  
________ ft of water  
________ m of water  
kPa X 0.334 m/psi  
COOLER FLOW RATE  
________ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure  
Drop Curves from  
Installation, Start-up and  
Service Instructions)  
Start and Operate Machine. Complete the Following:  
1. COMPLETE COMPONENT TEST.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT AND OIL CHARGE.  
3. RECORD COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT.  
4. RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.  
5. RECORD OPERATING TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES.  
6. PROVIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNERS PERSONNEL.  
Instruction Time ________ hours.  
CL-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING DATA:  
RECORD THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FROM THE PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES MODES WHEN  
MACHINE IS IN A STABLE OPERATING CONDITION:  
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE  
CIRCUIT A  
CIRCUIT B  
DISCHARGE PRESSURE  
DP.A  
DP.B  
SUCTION PRESSURE  
SP.A  
SP.B  
SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP  
SATURATED SUCTION TEMP  
LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE*  
DISCHARGE LINE TEMPERATURE*  
RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE*  
*Readings taken with a digital thermometer.  
SCT.A  
SST.A  
SCT.B  
SST.B  
COOLER EWT  
EWT  
LWT  
COOLER LWT  
OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE  
CONTROL POINT  
OAT  
CTPT  
CAP  
PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY  
LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID  
DLWT  
(Dual Chiller Control Only)  
Compressor Running Current All readings taken at full load.  
COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT  
COMPRESSOR A1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L2  
L2  
L2  
L3  
COMPRESSOR A2  
COMPRESSOR B1  
COMPRESSOR B2  
CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT  
FAN MOTOR 1  
L3  
FAN MOTOR 2  
FAN MOTOR 3  
FAN MOTOR 4  
COOLER PUMP MOTOR CURRENT  
COOLER PUMP 1  
L3  
COOLER PUMP 2  
CL-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Software Versions  
MODE RUN STATUS  
SUB-MODE ITEM  
DISPLAY  
ITEM  
EXPANSION  
VERS  
MBB  
CESR-131279- _ _-_ _  
CESR-131171- _ _-_ _  
CESR-131174- _ _-_ _  
CESR-131227- _ _-_ _  
MARQ  
EMM  
NAVI  
(PRESS ENTER & ESCAPE SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OBTAIN  
SOFTWARE VERSIONS)  
COMMENTS:  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
SIGNATURES:  
START-UP  
CUSTOMER  
TECHNICIAN _____________________________  
REPRESENTATIVE _____________________________  
DATE ___________________________________  
DATE ________________________________________  
CL-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
III. Unit Start-Up (cont)  
RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS  
UNIT (Configuration Settings)  
SUBMODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
VALUE  
UNIT  
UNIT CONFIGURATION  
COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE  
COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE  
COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE  
COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE  
SUPERHEAT SETPOINT  
REFRIGERANT  
SZA.1  
SZA.2  
SZB.1  
SZB.2  
SH.SP  
REFG  
FAN.S  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX.X F  
X
X
FAN STAGING SELECT  
PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY UNIT. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY OPT1.  
PRESS ENTER KEY. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:  
OPTIONS1 (Options Configuration)  
SUBMODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
VALUE  
OPT1  
UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE  
COOLER FLUID  
FLUD  
MLV.S  
MMR.S  
RG.EN  
CPC  
PM1E  
PM2E  
PM.P.S  
PM.SL  
PM.DY  
PM.DT  
ROT.P  
EMM  
X
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
ENBL/DSBL  
ON/OFF  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
X
XX MIN  
XXXX HRS  
YES/NO  
YES/NO  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT  
MOTORMASTER SELECT  
RETURN GAS SENSOR ENABLE  
COOLER PUMP CONTROL  
COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE  
COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE  
COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT  
COOLER PUMP SELECT  
COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY  
PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS  
ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW  
EMM MODULE INSTALLED  
CL-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
III. Unit Start-Up (cont)  
PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY OPT1. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY OPT2.  
PRESS ENTER KEY.  
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.  
OPTIONS2 (Options Configuration)  
SUBMODE  
OPT2  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS  
CONTROL METHOD  
VALUE  
CTRL  
SCNA  
SCNB  
BAUD  
LOAD  
LLCS  
X
XXX  
XXX  
X
X
SCN ADDRESS  
SCN BUS NUMBER  
SCN BAUD RATE  
LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT  
LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT  
HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT  
MINUTES OFF TIME  
X
LCWT  
DELY  
XX.X F  
XX  
ICE.M  
CLS.C  
LS.MD  
LS.ST  
LS.ND  
LS.LT  
ENBL/DSBL  
ENBL/DSBL  
X
00:00  
00:00  
XXX %  
ICE MODE ENABLE  
CLOSE CONTROL SELECT  
LOW SOUND MODE SELECT  
LOW SOUND START TIME  
LOW SOUND END TIME  
LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT  
RSET (Reset Configuration Settings)  
SUBMODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
VALUE  
RSET  
RESET COOL TEMP  
COOLING RESET TYPE  
CRST  
MA.DG  
RM.NO  
RM.F  
RM.DG  
RT.NO  
RT.F  
RT.DG  
DMDC  
DM20  
SHNM  
SHDL  
SHTM  
DLS1  
DLS2  
LLEN  
MSSL  
SLVA  
X
XX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XX.X °F  
X
XXX %  
XXX  
XXX %  
XXX  
4-20 - DEGREES RESET  
REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP  
REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP  
REMOTE - DEGREES RESET  
RETURN - NO RESET TEMP  
RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP  
RETURN - DEGREES RESET  
DEMAND LIMIT SELECT  
DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA  
LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER  
LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA  
MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME  
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1  
DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2  
LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE  
MASTER/SLAVE SELECT  
SLAVE ADDRESS  
XXX %  
XXX %  
ENBL/DSBL  
SLVE/MAST  
XXX  
LLBL  
LLBD  
LLDY  
X
XXX  
XXX  
LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT  
LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA  
LAG START DELAY  
PARA  
YES/NO  
PARALLEL CONFIGURATION  
CL-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
III. Unit Start-Up (cont)  
PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY RSET. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY SLCT.  
PRESS ENTER KEY.  
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:  
SLCT (Setpoint and Ramp Load Configuration)  
SUBMODE  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
VALUE  
SLCT  
SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD  
COOLING SETPOINT SELECT  
RAMP LOAD SELECT  
COOLING RAMP LOADING  
SCHEDULE NUMBER  
CLSP  
RL.S  
CRMP  
SCHD  
Z.GN  
X
ENBL/DSBL  
X.X  
XX  
X.X  
DEADBAND MULTIPLIER  
PRESS ESCAPE KEY SEVERAL TIMES TO GET TO THE MODE LEVEL (BLANK DISPLAY). USE THE  
ARROW KEYS TO SCROLL TO THE SET POINT LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY SETPOINTS.  
RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:  
SETPOINT  
SUBMODE  
COOL  
ITEM  
DISPLAY  
DESCRIPTION  
COOLING SETPOINTS  
COOLING SETPOINT 1  
COOLING SETPOINT 2  
ICE SETPOINT  
VALUE  
CSP.1  
CSP.2  
CSP.3  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS  
CALCULATED HP SETPOINT A  
CALCULATED HP SETPOINT B  
BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT  
BRINE FREEZE POINT  
HEAD  
FRZ  
HD.P.A  
HD.P.B  
XXX.X °F  
XXX.X °F  
BR.FZ  
XXX.X °F  
CL-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
III. Unit Start-Up (cont)  
COMPONENT TEST  
USE ESCAPE/ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE CONFIGURATION LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY DISP.  
PRESS ENTER AGAIN TO DISPLAY TESTFOLLOWED BY OFF. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY AT  
OFFAND ENTER AGAIN SO OFFDISPLAY FLASHES. PASSAND WORDWILL FLASH IF PASSWORD  
NEEDS TO BE ENTERED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY PASSWORD FIELD AND USE THE ENTER KEY FOR  
EACH OF THE FOUR PASSWORD DIGITS. USE ARROW KEYS IF PASSWORD IS OTHER THAN STANDARD.  
AT FLASHING OFFDISPLAY, PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ONAND PRESS ENTER. ALL LED  
SEGMENTS AND MODE LEDS WILL LIGHT UP. PRESS ESCAPE TO STOP THE TEST. PRESS ESCAPE TO  
RETURN TO THE DISPDISPLAY. PRESS THE ESCAPE KEY AGAIN AND USE THE ARROW KEYS TO ILLU-  
MINATE THE SERVICE TEST LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY TEST. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY  
AT OFFAND ENTER AGAIN SO OFFFLASHES. PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY AND ENTER TO ENABLE  
THE MANUAL MODE. PRESS ESCAPE AND DISPLAY NOW SAYS TEST’ ‘ON. REFER TO THE TABLE  
BELOW.  
Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory  
KEYPAD  
ENTRY  
ITEM  
Completed  
(Yes/No)  
SUB-MODE  
TEST  
ITEM DISPLAY  
COMMENT  
EXPANSION  
ON/OFF  
SERVICE TEST MODE  
To Enable Service Test Mode,  
move Enable/Off/Remote  
Contact switch to OFF. Change  
TEST to ON. Move switch to  
ENABLE.  
ENTER  
OUTPUTS AND PUMPS  
FAN 1 RELAY  
SIZES 010-018,  
Condenser fan at low speed  
SIZES 022-030  
ENTER  
FAN1  
FAN2  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
Condenser fan A1 energized  
SIZES 032-055,  
Condenser fan A2 energized  
SIZES 022-030,  
Condenser fan A2 energized  
SIZES 032-040,  
FAN 2 RELAY  
Condenser fan B1 at high speed  
SIZES 042-055,  
OUTS  
Condenser fan B2 energized  
CLP.1  
CLP.2  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY  
COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY  
COOLER/PUMP HEATER  
REMOTE ALARM RELAY  
CL.HT ON/OFF  
RMT.A ON/OFF  
CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST  
COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY  
ENTER  
CC.A1 ON/OFF  
CC.A2 ON/OFF  
CMPA  
CMPB  
COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY  
MLV  
ON/OFF  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY  
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST  
COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY  
ENTER  
CC.B1 ON/OFF  
CC.B2 ON/OFF  
See Note  
See Note  
See Note  
COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY  
MLV  
ON/OFF  
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY  
NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.  
Copyright 2003 Sterling  
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.  
Book  
2
PC 903  
Catalog No. 533-00047  
Printed in U.S.A.  
Form 30RA-2T  
Pg CL-8  
1-03  
Replaces: 30RA-1T  
Tab  
5c  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Shoprider Mobility Aid UL8W User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine 99K28 User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine 112 1 User Manual
Snapper Lawn Aerator 4553 User Manual
Sony Camcorder CCD TR3300E User Manual
Sony Camcorder NEX FS100U User Manual
Sony Camcorder RM LVR2V User Manual
Sony Car Stereo System CDX 4150RDS User Manual
Sony eBook Reader 4 260 631 121 User Manual
Swisher Lawn Mower ONFT1150 User Manual